Xenon™ XP 195X Series
Area-Imaging Scanners and Bases
Scanner Models: 1950g, 1950h, 1952g, 1952h, 1952g-BF, 1952h-BF
Base Models: CCB01-010BT, CCB01-010BT-BF, CCB-H-010BT, CCB-H-010BT-BF

User Guide

Disclaimer
Honeywell International Inc. (“HII”) reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained inthis document without prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult HII to determine whether any such changes
have been made. The information in this publication does not represent a commitment on the part of HII.
HII shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein; nor for incidental or consequential
damages resulting from the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. HII disclaims all responsibility for theselection and use of software and/or hardware to achieve intended results.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of thisdocument may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without the prior written consent of HII.
Copyright  2018-2020 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
Web Address: www.honeywellaidc.com

Trademarks
Microsoft® Windows® and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Apple is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Other product names or marks mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of othercompanies and are the property of their respective owners.

Patents
For patent information, refer to www.hsmpats.com.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Customer Support ..................................................................................................................... xvii
Technical Assistance .......................................................................................................... xvii
Product Service and Repair ............................................................................................. xvii
Limited Warranty ................................................................................................................. xvii

Chapter 1 - Get Started .................................................................................... 1
About This Manual......................................................................................................................... 1
Unpack Your Device....................................................................................................................... 1
Connect the Device........................................................................................................................ 2
Connect with USB.................................................................................................................... 2
Connect with Keyboard Wedge .......................................................................................... 4
Connect with RS232 Serial Port ........................................................................................ 6
Connect with RS485............................................................................................................... 8
Mount a CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Charge Base.......................................... 10
Mount a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Charge Base .......................................... 10
Horizontal Mount.................................................................................................................. 11
Vertical Mount ....................................................................................................................... 12
Reading Techniques................................................................................................................... 12
Menu Barcode Security Settings .......................................................................................... 13
Set Custom Defaults .................................................................................................................. 13
Reset the Custom Defaults...................................................................................................... 13

Chapter 2 - Program the Interface ............................................................. 15
Introduction................................................................................................................................... 15
Program the Interface - Plug and Play............................................................................... 15

Xenon XP User Guideiii

Keyboard Wedge ..........................................................................................................................15
Laptop Direct Connect ..............................................................................................................16
RS232 Serial Port.........................................................................................................................16
RS485 ...............................................................................................................................................16
USB IBM SurePos ........................................................................................................................17
USB PC or Macintosh Keyboard ............................................................................................18
USB HID...........................................................................................................................................18
USB Serial .......................................................................................................................................18
CTS/RTS Emulation .............................................................................................................19
ACK/NAK Mode......................................................................................................................19
Verifone® Ruby Terminal............................................................................................................19
Gilbarco® Terminal.......................................................................................................................20
Honeywell Bioptic Aux Port .....................................................................................................20
Datalogic™ Magellan® Aux Port..............................................................................................20
Wincor Nixdorf Terminal ...........................................................................................................21
Wincor Nixdorf Beetle™ Terminal ..........................................................................................21
Wincor Nixdorf RS232 Mode A...............................................................................................22
Keyboard Country Layout.........................................................................................................22
Keyboard Wedge Modifiers......................................................................................................29
ALT Mode ..................................................................................................................................29
Keyboard Style ..............................................................................................................................30
Keyboard Conversion .................................................................................................................31
Control Character Output.........................................................................................................32
Keyboard Modifiers.....................................................................................................................32
RS232 Modifiers ..........................................................................................................................34
RS232 Baud Rate ..................................................................................................................34
RS232 Word Length: Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity ............................................35
RS232 Receiver Time-Out .................................................................................................36
RS232 Handshake ................................................................................................................36
RS232 Timeout.......................................................................................................................37
XON/XOFF...............................................................................................................................37
ACK/NAK ..................................................................................................................................38

iv

Xenon XP User Guide

Scanner to Bioptic Communication .....................................................................................38
Scanner-Bioptic Packet Mode..........................................................................................38
Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Mode....................................................................................39
Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Timeout ..............................................................................39

Chapter 3 - Cordless System Operation .....................................................41
How the Cordless Charge Base/Access Point Works.....................................................41
Link the Scanner to a Charge Base.......................................................................................41
Link the Scanner to an Access Point ....................................................................................42
Replace a Linked Scanner ........................................................................................................42
Communication Between the Cordless Systemand the Host...................................................................................................................................42
Program the Scanner and Base or Access Point .............................................................43
RF (Radio Frequency) Module Operation...........................................................................43
System Conditions.......................................................................................................................44
Page Button....................................................................................................................................45
Page Button and Presentation Modes ................................................................................45
Temporary Streaming Presentation Timeout.............................................................46
Presentation Mode in the Base........................................................................................46
Charge Information.....................................................................................................................46
Battery Information for the Xenon XP 1952g/1952h ...................................................47
Battery Recommendations................................................................................................47
Safety Precautions for Lithium Batteries.....................................................................47
Proper Disposal of the Battery .........................................................................................48
Instant Charge Pack Information for the
Xenon XP 1952g-BF/Xenon XP 1952h-BF .......................................................................48
Beeper and LED Sequences and Meaning ........................................................................48
Scanner Communication and Scanning......................................................................49
Scanner Charge Pack Status ............................................................................................49
Base/Access Point Communication and Scanning .................................................50
Base Power Communication Indicator .........................................................................50
Base Charge Status ..............................................................................................................50
Low Power Alerts ..........................................................................................................................51
Low Power Alert Range........................................................................................................51

Xenon XP User Guidev

Low Power Alert Flash Number .......................................................................................51
Low Power Alert Repeat ......................................................................................................52
Low Power Alert Beep ..........................................................................................................52
Reset Scanner ...............................................................................................................................53
Scan While in Base Cradle........................................................................................................53
Base Charge Modes....................................................................................................................53
Page ..................................................................................................................................................54
Page Mode ...............................................................................................................................54
Page Pitch ................................................................................................................................55
Error Indicators.............................................................................................................................55
Beeper Pitch - Base Error...................................................................................................55
Number of Beeps - Base Error .........................................................................................56
Scanner Report.............................................................................................................................56
Scanner Address ..........................................................................................................................56
Base or Access Point Address .................................................................................................56
Scanner Modes.............................................................................................................................56
Charge Only Mode ................................................................................................................57
Charge and Link Mode........................................................................................................57
Linked Modes .........................................................................................................................57
Unlink the Scanner......................................................................................................................58
Override Locked Scanner...................................................................................................59
Out-of-Range Alarm...................................................................................................................59
Alarm Sound Type .................................................................................................................59
Scanner Power Time-Out Timer.............................................................................................60
Flexible Power Management...................................................................................................62
Xenon XP 1952g/1952h ....................................................................................................62
Xenon XP 1952g-BF/1952h-BF .....................................................................................63
Batch Mode ....................................................................................................................................63
Batch Mode Beep ..................................................................................................................64
Batch Mode Storage ............................................................................................................64
Batch Mode Quantity...........................................................................................................65
Enter Quantities.....................................................................................................................65
Batch Mode Output Order .................................................................................................67vi

Xenon XP User Guide

Total Records...........................................................................................................................67
Delete Last Code....................................................................................................................68
Clear All Codes........................................................................................................................68
Transmit Records to Host...................................................................................................68
Batch Mode Transmit Delay ..............................................................................................69
Multiple Scanner Operation ....................................................................................................69
Scanner Name...............................................................................................................................70
Application Work Groups ..........................................................................................................71
Application Work Group Selection..................................................................................72
Reset the Factory Defaults: All Application Work Groups ............................................72
Reset the Custom Defaults: All Application Work Groups ...........................................73
Use the Scanner with Bluetooth Devices............................................................................73
Bluetooth Secure Simple Pairing (SSP)........................................................................73
Bluetooth HID Keyboard Connect...................................................................................74
Virtual Keyboard.....................................................................................................................76Bluetooth HID Keyboard Disconnect.............................................................................76
Pair with Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) Devices.........................................................76Bluetooth Serial Port - PCs/Laptops.............................................................................76
PDAs/Mobility Systems Devices .....................................................................................77
Change the Scanner’s Bluetooth PIN Code ................................................................77
Minimize Bluetooth/ISM Band Network Activity ............................................................77
Auto Reconnect Mode .........................................................................................................77
Maximum Link Attempts ....................................................................................................78
Relink Time-Out .....................................................................................................................79
Bluetooth/ISM Network Activity Examples.................................................................79
Host Acknowledgment ...............................................................................................................80
Host ACK On/Off ...................................................................................................................81
Host ACK Timeout .................................................................................................................82
Host ACK Responses ............................................................................................................82

Chapter 4 - Input/Output Settings .............................................................83
Power Up Beeper ..........................................................................................................................83
Beep on BEL Character .............................................................................................................84

Xenon XP User Guidevii

Trigger Click ...................................................................................................................................84
Good Read and Error Indicators ............................................................................................84
Beeper – Good Read.............................................................................................................84
Beeper Volume – Good Read ............................................................................................85
Beeper Pitch – Good Read .................................................................................................85
Vibrate – Good Read.............................................................................................................86
Beeper Pitch – Error .............................................................................................................86
Beeper Duration – Good Read..........................................................................................87
LED – Good Read ..................................................................................................................87
Number of Beeps – Good Read........................................................................................87
Number of Beeps – Error....................................................................................................87
Good Read Delay ...................................................................................................................88
User-Specified Good Read Delay....................................................................................88
Trigger Modes ...............................................................................................................................89
Manual Trigger .......................................................................................................................89
Trigger Toggle .........................................................................................................................89
Serial Trigger ...........................................................................................................................91
Presentation Mode......................................................................................................................91
Triggered Presentation Mode...........................................................................................92
Presentation LED Behavior after Decode....................................................................92
Presentation Centering.......................................................................................................92
In-Stand Sensor Mode...............................................................................................................94
Poor Quality Codes......................................................................................................................94
Poor Quality 1D Codes ........................................................................................................94
Poor Quality PDF Codes .....................................................................................................95
Low Resolution PDF Codes ...............................................................................................95
CodeGate™......................................................................................................................................96
Streaming Presentation™ Mode ............................................................................................96
Streaming Presentation In-Stand ..................................................................................97
Hands Free Time-Out.................................................................................................................97
Reread Delay..................................................................................................................................97
User-Specified Reread Delay............................................................................................98
2D Reread Delay ....................................................................................................................98

viii

Xenon XP User Guide

Character Activation ...................................................................................................................99
Activation Character.............................................................................................................99
End Character Activation After Good Read .................................................................99
Character Activation Timeout........................................................................................100
Character Deactivation...........................................................................................................100
Deactivation Character ....................................................................................................100
Illumination Lights ...................................................................................................................101
Aimer Delay..................................................................................................................................101
User-Specified Aimer Delay............................................................................................102
Aimer Mode .................................................................................................................................102
Centering......................................................................................................................................102
Single Code Centering......................................................................................................103
Custom Centering ..............................................................................................................103
Preferred Symbology ...............................................................................................................104
High Priority Symbology..................................................................................................105
Low Priority Symbology ...................................................................................................105
Preferred Symbology Time-out.....................................................................................106
Preferred Symbology Default ........................................................................................106
Output Sequence Overview...................................................................................................106
Output Sequence Editor ..................................................................................................106
To Add an Output Sequence...........................................................................................106
Output Sequence Editor Commands................................................................................107
Enter Output Sequence ..........................................................................................................110
Partial Sequence.................................................................................................................110
Good Read Tone - Output Sequences ........................................................................114
Multiple Symbols ......................................................................................................................115
No Read.........................................................................................................................................115
Video Reverse..............................................................................................................................116
Working Orientation.................................................................................................................117

Chapter 5 - Healthcare Settings ...............................................................119
Quiet Operations - Combination Codes...........................................................................119
Silent Mode with Flashing LED ....................................................................................119

Xenon XP User Guideix

Silent Mode with Long LED ........................................................................................... 120
Very Low Beeper (Nighttime Mode)............................................................................ 120
Low Beeper (Daytime Mode) ......................................................................................... 121
Quiet Operations - LED and Volume Settings .............................................................. 121
Linking LED Colors and Sound .................................................................................... 121
Number of LED Flashes .................................................................................................. 122
LED Flash Rate.................................................................................................................... 122
LED Solid (No Flash)......................................................................................................... 123
Page Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 123
Out-of-Range Alarm Volume......................................................................................... 124
Out-of-Range Delay.......................................................................................................... 125

Chapter 6 - Data Edit ...................................................................................127
Prefix/Suffix Overview ............................................................................................................ 127
Points to Keep In Mind ..................................................................................................... 127
Add a Prefix or Suffix:........................................................................................................ 128
Example: Add a Tab Suffix to All Symbologies........................................................ 128
Clear One or All Prefixes or Suffixes ........................................................................... 128
Add a Carriage Return Suffix to All Symbologies .................................................. 129
Prefix Selections........................................................................................................................ 129
Suffix Selections........................................................................................................................ 129
Function Code Transmit......................................................................................................... 130
Intercharacter, Interfunction, and Intermessage Delays.......................................... 130
Intercharacter Delay ......................................................................................................... 130
User Specified Intercharacter Delay........................................................................... 131
Interfunction Delay ........................................................................................................... 131
Intermessage Delay........................................................................................................... 132

Chapter 7 - Data Format .............................................................................133
Data Format Editor Introduction........................................................................................ 133
Show Data Format.................................................................................................................... 134
Add a Data Format.................................................................................................................... 134
Other Programming Selections.................................................................................... 135

xXenon XP User GuideTerminal ID Table ................................................................................................................136
Data Format Editor Commands ..........................................................................................136
Send Commands ................................................................................................................136
Move Commands................................................................................................................142
Search Commands.............................................................................................................143
Miscellaneous Commands .............................................................................................146
Data Formatter...........................................................................................................................149
Data Format Non-Match Error Tone...........................................................................150
Primary/Alternate Data Formats ........................................................................................151
Single Scan Data Format Change................................................................................151

Chapter 8 - Symbologies.............................................................................153
All Symbologies..........................................................................................................................154
Message Length Description ...............................................................................................154
Codabar.........................................................................................................................................154
Code 39 .........................................................................................................................................157
Interleaved 2 of 5.......................................................................................................................160
NEC 2 of 5 ....................................................................................................................................162
Code 93 .........................................................................................................................................163
Straight 2 of 5 Industrial (three-bar start/stop) ...........................................................165
Straight 2 of 5 IATA (two-bar start/stop) .........................................................................166
Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................................167
Code 11 .........................................................................................................................................168
Code 128 ......................................................................................................................................169
ISBT 128 Concatenation..................................................................................................169
GS1-128 .......................................................................................................................................171
Telepen ..........................................................................................................................................172
UPC-A ............................................................................................................................................173
UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code ..............................................................175
Coupon GS1 DataBar Output...............................................................................................176
UPC-E0 .........................................................................................................................................177
UPC-E1 .........................................................................................................................................179

Xenon XP User Guidexi

EAN/JAN-13 ............................................................................................................................... 180
ISBN Translate..................................................................................................................... 187
EAN/JAN-8 .................................................................................................................................. 187
MSI.................................................................................................................................................. 189
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional............................................................................................. 191
GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................................. 192
GS1 DataBar Expanded ......................................................................................................... 192
Trioptic Code............................................................................................................................... 193
Codablock A ................................................................................................................................ 193
Codablock F ................................................................................................................................ 194
Label Code................................................................................................................................... 195
PDF417......................................................................................................................................... 195
MacroPDF417............................................................................................................................ 196
MicroPDF417 ............................................................................................................................. 196
GS1 Composite Codes ............................................................................................................ 197
GS1 Emulation........................................................................................................................... 198
TCIF Linked Code 39 (TLC39) ............................................................................................. 199
QR Code........................................................................................................................................ 200
DotCode........................................................................................................................................ 202
Digimarc Barcode™ .................................................................................................................. 203
Data Matrix.................................................................................................................................. 204
MaxiCode ..................................................................................................................................... 206
Aztec Code ................................................................................................................................... 207
Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) Code ...................................................................................... 208
Postal Codes - 2D ..................................................................................................................... 209
Planet Code Check Digit.................................................................................................. 212
Postnet Check Digit........................................................................................................... 213
Australian Post Interpretation....................................................................................... 213
Postal Codes - Linear.............................................................................................................. 214
China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) ..................................................................................... 214
Korea Post ............................................................................................................................. 215

xii

Xenon XP User Guide

Chapter 9 - Imaging Commands ...............................................................217
Single-Use Basis .......................................................................................................................217
Command Syntax......................................................................................................................217
Image Snap - IMGSNP............................................................................................................218
IMGSNP Modifiers .............................................................................................................218
Image Ship - IMGSHP .............................................................................................................221
IMGSHP Modifiers .............................................................................................................222
Image Size Compatibility.................................................................................................229
Intelligent Signature Capture - IMGBOX.........................................................................230
Signature Capture Optimize ..........................................................................................230
IMGBOX Modifiers .............................................................................................................231
RF Default Imaging Device ...................................................................................................235

Chapter 10 - Utilities ...................................................................................237
To Add a Test Code I.D. Prefix to All Symbologies.........................................................237
Show Software Revision .........................................................................................................237
Test Menu.....................................................................................................................................237
TotalFreedom..............................................................................................................................238
Application Plug-Ins (Apps)..................................................................................................238
EZConfig for Scanning Introduction .................................................................................239
Configure with EZConfig for Scanning......................................................................239
Reset the Factory Defaults ....................................................................................................240

Chapter 11 - Serial Programming Commands.......................................241
Conventions ................................................................................................................................241
Menu Command Syntax.........................................................................................................241
Query Commands .....................................................................................................................242
Trigger Commands...................................................................................................................244
Reset the Custom Defaults ...................................................................................................245
Menu Commands .....................................................................................................................246

Xenon XP User Guidexiii

Chapter 12 - Product Specifications........................................................277
Xenon XP 1950g/1950h Corded Scanner Product Specifications ...................... 277
Xenon XP 1952g/1952h Cordless Scanner Product Specifications ................... 278
Xenon XP 1952g-BF/1952h-BF Scanner Product Specifications ....................... 280
CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Charge Base
Product Specifications ........................................................................................................... 281
CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Charge Base
Product Specifications ........................................................................................................... 282
Depth of Field Charts .............................................................................................................. 283
1950g/1952g/1952g-BF Typical Performance.................................................... 283
1950g/1952g/1952g-BF Guaranteed Performance.......................................... 283
1950h/1952h/1952h-BF Typical Performance ................................................... 284
1950h/1952h/1952h-BF Guaranteed Performance ......................................... 284
Standard Connector Pinouts ............................................................................................... 285
Keyboard Wedge................................................................................................................. 285
Serial Output ........................................................................................................................ 286
RS485 Output...................................................................................................................... 286
USB .......................................................................................................................................... 287
Required Safety Labels .......................................................................................................... 288
Scanner .................................................................................................................................. 288
CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Base ................................................................... 289
CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Base ................................................................... 290

Chapter 13 - Maintenance and Troubleshooting ..................................291
Repairs .......................................................................................................................................... 291
Maintenance............................................................................................................................... 291
Clean the Scanner.............................................................................................................. 291
Clean the Window .............................................................................................................. 292
About Disinfectant-ready Models ............................................................................... 292
Inspect Cords and Connectors ..................................................................................... 292
Replace Cables in Corded Scanners ................................................................................. 292
Replace an Interface Cable ............................................................................................ 293
Replace Cables and Batteries in Cordless Systems.................................................... 293

xiv

Xenon XP User GuideReplace an Interface Cable in a Base .........................................................................293
Change a Scanner Battery ..............................................................................................294
Troubleshoot a Corded Scanner..........................................................................................294
Troubleshoot a Cordless System.........................................................................................295
Troubleshoot a Base ..........................................................................................................295
Troubleshoot a Cordless Scanner ................................................................................295

Chapter A - Reference Charts ....................................................................297
Symbology Charts.....................................................................................................................297
Linear Symbologies ...........................................................................................................297
2D Symbologies ..................................................................................................................298
Postal Symbologies ...........................................................................................................299
ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252) ....................................................................300
Lower ASCII Reference Table................................................................................................301
ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements ................................................................304
Keyboard Key References.......................................................................................................307

Sample Symbols............................................................................................309
Programming Chart .....................................................................................311

Xenon XP User Guide

xv

xvi

Xenon XP User Guide

Customer Support
Technical AssistanceTo search our knowledge base for a solution or to log in to the Technical Support
portal and report a problem, go to www.hsmcontactsupport.com.
For our latest contact information, see www.honeywellaidc.com/locations.

Product Service and Repair
Honeywell International Inc. provides service for all of its products through service
centers throughout the world. To obtain warranty or non-warranty service, return
your product to Honeywell (postage paid) with a copy of the dated purchaserecord. To learn more, go to www.honeywellaidc.com and select Service & Repair atthe bottom of the page.

Limited Warranty
For warranty information, go to www.honeywellaidc.com and click Resources >Product Warranty.

Xenon XP User Guidexvii

xviiiXenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

1GET STARTED

About This ManualThis User Guide provides installation and programming instructions for the
Xenon™ XP 1950 corded area-imaging scanners and the Xenon XP 1952 cordlessarea-imaging scanners. Product specifications, dimensions, warranty, andcustomer support information are also included.
Honeywell barcode scanners are factory programmed for the most common
terminal and communications settings. If you need to change these settings,
programming is accomplished by scanning the barcodes in this guide.
An asterisk (*) next to an option indicates the default setting.

Unpack Your Device
After you open the shipping carton containing the product, take the following
steps:•

Check for damage during shipment. Report damage immediately to the carrier
who delivered the carton.

•

Make sure the items in the carton match your order.

•

Save the shipping container for later storage or shipping.

Xenon XP User Guide

1

Connect the Device
Connect with USB
A scanner or a cordless base can be connected to the USB port of a computer.
1. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the device first, then to the computer.
Corded Xenon XP Scanner USB Connection:

Note: The power supply must be ordered separately, if needed.
2. If you are connecting a CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF or CCB-H-010BT/
CCB-H-010BT-BF base horizontally, make sure the cables are secured in thewireways in the bottom of the cordless base and the base sits flat on ahorizontal surface. If you are connecting a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF
Base vertically, see Mount a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Charge Base on
page 10.
CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Base USB Connection:

2

Xenon XP User GuideCCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Base USB Connection:

3. The scanner beeps.
4. Verify the scanner or cordless base operation by scanning a barcode from the
Sample Symbols, beginning on page 309.
The unit defaults to a USB PC Keyboard. Refer to page 18 for other USB terminal
settings.
For additional USB programming and technical information, refer to “USB
Application Note,” available at www.honeywellaidc.com.

Xenon XP User Guide

3

Connect with Keyboard Wedge
A scanner or cordless base can be connected between the keyboard and PC as a
“keyboard wedge,” where the scanner provides data output that is similar to
keyboard entries. The following is an example of a keyboard wedge connection:
1. Turn off power and disconnect the keyboard cable from the back of the terminal/computer.
2. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the device and to the terminal/
computer.
Corded Xenon XP Scanner Keyboard Wedge Connection:

Note: The power supply must be ordered separately, if needed.
3. If you are connecting a CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF or CCB-H-010BT/
CCB-H-010BT-BF base horizontally, make sure the cables are secured in thewireways in the bottom of the cordless base and the base sits flat on ahorizontal surface. If you are connecting a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF
Base vertically, see Mount a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Charge Base on
page 10.

4

Xenon XP User Guide

CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Base Keyboard Wedge Connection:

CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Base Keyboard Wedge Connection:

4. Turn the terminal/computer power back on. The scanner beeps.
5. Verify the scanner or cordless base operation by scanning a barcode from the
Sample Symbols, beginning on page 309.
The unit defaults to an IBM PC AT and compatibles keyboard wedge interface witha USA keyboard. A carriage return (CR) suffix is added to barcode data.

Xenon XP User Guide

5

Connect with RS232 Serial Port
1. Turn off power to the terminal/computer.
2. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the scanner.
Note: For the scanner or cordless base to work properly, you must have the correct cable foryour type of terminal/computer.
Corded Xenon XP Scanner RS232 Serial Port Connection:

Note: The power supply must be ordered separately, if needed.
3. If you are connecting a CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF or CCB-H-010BT/
CCB-H-010BT-BF base horizontally, make sure the cables are secured in thewireways in the bottom of the cordless base and the base sits flat on ahorizontal surface. If you are connecting a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF

6Xenon XP User Guide

Base vertically, see Mount a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Charge Base on
page 10.
CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Base RS232 Serial Port Connection:

CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Base RS232 Serial Port Connection:

4. Plug the serial connector into the serial port on your computer. Tighten the twoscrews to secure the connector to the port.
5. Once the scanner or cordless base has been fully connected, power up thecomputer.
This interface programs 115,200 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.

Xenon XP User Guide

7

Connect with RS485
A Xenon scanner or cordless base can be connected for an IBM POS terminalinterface.
1. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the device, then to the computer.
Corded Xenon XP Scanner RS485 Connection:

Note: The power supply must be ordered separately, if needed.
2. If you are connecting a CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF or CCB-H-010BT/
CCB-H-010BT-BF base horizontally, make sure the cables are secured in thewireways in the bottom of the cordless base and the base sits flat on ahorizontal surface. If you are connecting a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF
Base vertically, see Mount a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Charge Base on
page 10.

8

Xenon XP User Guide

CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Base RS485 Connection:

CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Base RS485 Connection:

3. Turn the terminal/computer power back on. The scanner beeps.
4. Verify the scanner or cordless base operation by scanning a barcode from the
Sample Symbols, beginning on page 309. The scanner beeps once.
For further RS485 settings, refer to RS485, page 16.

Xenon XP User Guide

9

Mount a CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Charge Base
2.8 in.
72.1mm3.35 in.
85.09mm2.36 in.
59.84mm8x32 threadx .39 in. (10mm) deep

Mount a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Charge Base
The CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Base can be mounted on either a horizontal
or vertical surface. Route the cables through the top, bottom, or sides of the baseand secure the cables in the wireways.

When mounted on a vertical surface, a locking system is used to secure thescanner when it is in the stand. When mounted on a horizontal surface, the locking
mechanism should be set to unlocked (pushed down). When mounted on a verticalsurface, the locking mechanism should be set to locked (pushed up).

10

Xenon XP User GuideUnlocked position forhorizontal mount

Locked position forvertical mountUse 30mm screws, appropriate for the mounting surface material, to mount thebase securely.

Horizontal Mount
43.97mm (1.73")

72.97mm (2.87")

85.1mm (3.35")

72.37mm (2.85")

43.97mm (1.73")

Xenon XP User Guide

11

Vertical Mount
38.92mm(1.53")

33.97mm(1.34")

15.07mm(0.59")
15.17mm (0.59")100mm (3.94")

115.27mm (4.54")

Reading Techniques
The Xenon XP scanners have a view finder that projects a bright red aiming beamthat corresponds to the scanner’s horizontal field of view. The aiming beam shouldbe centered over the barcode, but it can be positioned in any direction for a goodread.
Linear Barcodes

12

2D Matrix Symbol

Xenon XP User Guide

Menu Barcode Security Settings
Honeywell scanners are programmed by scanning menu barcodes or by sending
serial commands to the scanner. If you want to restrict the ability to scan menu
codes, you can use the Menu Barcode Security settings. Contact the nearest
technical support office (see Technical Assistance on page xvii) for further
information.

Set Custom Defaults
You have the ability to create a set of menu commands as your own, custom
defaults. To do so, scan the Set Custom Defaults barcode below before scanningthe menu commands for your custom defaults. If a menu command requires
scanning numeric codes from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311,
then a Save code, that entire sequence will be saved to your custom defaults. Whenyou have entered all the commands you want to save for your custom defaults,
scan the Save Custom Defaults barcode.

Set Custom Defaults

Save Custom Defaults

Note: When using a cordless system, the Custom Defaults settings apply to all workgroups.
Scanning the Save Defaults barcode also causes both the scanner and the base or
Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked. The scanner must be placed inits base to re-establish the link before any setup codes are entered. If using an Access
Point, the linking barcode must be scanned. See Cordless System Operation
beginning on page 41 for additional information.
You may have a series of custom settings and want to correct a single setting. To doso, just scan the new setting to overwrite the old one. For example, if you had
previously saved the setting for Beeper Volume at Low to your custom defaults,
and decide you want the beeper volume set to High, just scan the Set Custom
Defaults barcode, then scan the Beeper Volume High menu code, and then Save
Custom Defaults. The rest of the custom defaults will remain, but the beeper
volume setting will be updated.

Reset the Custom Defaults
If you want the custom default settings restored to your scanner, scan the Activate
Custom Defaults barcode below. This is the recommended default barcode formost users. It resets the scanner to the custom default settings. If there are no

Xenon XP User Guide

13

custom defaults, it will reset the scanner to the factory default settings. Any
settings that have not been specified through the custom defaults will be defaulted
to the factory default settings.

Activate Custom Defaults

Note: If using a cordless system, scanning this barcode also causes both the scanner andthe base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked. The scanner must
be placed in its base to re-establish the link. If using an Access Point, the linking
barcode must be scanned. See Cordless System Operation beginning on page 41 foradditional information.

14

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

2PROGRAM THE INTERFACE

Introduction
This chapter describes how to program your system for the desired interface.

Program the Interface - Plug and Play
Plug and Play barcodes provide instant scanner set up for commonly usedinterfaces.
Note: After you scan one of the codes, power cycle the host terminal to have the interface in
effect.

Keyboard Wedge
If you want your system programmed for an IBM PC AT and compatibles keyboard
wedge interface with a USA keyboard, scan the barcode below. Keyboard wedge isthe default interface.
Note: The following barcode also programs a carriage return (CR) suffix.

IBM PC AT and Compatibles with
CR suffix

Xenon XP User Guide

15

Laptop Direct Connect
For most laptops, scanning the Laptop Direct Connect barcode allows operationof the scanner in parallel with the integral keyboard. The following Laptop Direct
Connect barcode also programs a carriage return (CR) suffix and turns on Emulate
External Keyboard (page 31).

Laptop Direct Connect
with CR suffix

RS232 Serial Port
The RS232 Interface barcode is used when connecting to the serial port of a PC or
terminal. The following RS232 Interface barcode also programs a carriage return(CR) and a line feed (LF) suffix, baud rate, and data format as indicated below. It
also changes the trigger mode to manual.
OptionSetting

Baud Rate

115,200 bps

Data Format

8 data bits, no parity bit, 1 stop bit

RS232 Interface

RS485
Scan one of the following “Plug and Play” codes to program the scanner for an IBM
POS terminal interface.
Note: After scanning one of these codes, you must power cycle the cash register.

IBM Port 5B Interface

IBM Port 9B
HHBCR-1 Interface

16

Xenon XP User Guide

IBM Port 17 Interface

IBM Port 9B
HHBCR-2 Interface

Each barcode above also programs the following suffixes for each symbology:
Symbology

SuffixSymbology

SuffixEAN 80C

Code 3900 0A 0B

EAN 13

16

Interleaved 2 of 5

00 0D 0B

UPC A

0D

Code 128 *00 0A 0B

UPC E

0A

Code 128 **00 18 0B

MaxiCode

00 2F 0B

* Suffixes programmed for Code 128 with IBM 4683 Port 5B, IBM 4683 Port 9B HHBCR-1, and IBM 4683
Port 17 Interfaces**Suffixes programmed for Code 128 with IBM 4683 Port 9 HHBCR-2 Interface

USB IBM SurePos
Scan one of the following “Plug and Play” codes to program the scanner for an IBM
SurePos (USB handheld scanner) or IBM SurePos (USB tabletop scanner)interface.
Note: After scanning one of these codes, you must power cycle the cash register.

USB IBM SurePos(USB Handheld Scanner)
Interface

USB IBM SurePos(USB Tabletop Scanner)
Interface

Each barcode above also programs the following suffixes for each symbology:

Xenon XP User Guide

Symbology

SuffixSymbology

SuffixEAN 80C

Code 3900 0A 0B

EAN 13

16

Interleaved 2 of 5

00 0D 0B

UPC A

0D

Code 12800 18 0B

UPC E

0A

Code 3900 0A 0B

17

USB PC or Macintosh Keyboard
Scan one of the following codes to program the scanner for USB PC Keyboard or
USB Macintosh Keyboard. Scanning these codes also adds a CR suffix.

USB Keyboard (PC)USB Keyboard (Mac)USB Japanese Keyboard (PC)USB HID
Scan the following code to program the scanner for USB HID Barcode scanners.

USB HID Barcode Scanner

USB Serial
If you are using a Microsoft® Windows® PC, you will need to download the latest
driver from the Honeywell website (www.honeywellaidc.com) and go to Get
Resources - Downloads - Software. The driver will use the next available COM Port
number. Apple® Macintosh computers recognize the scanner as a USB CDC classdevice and automatically use a class driver.
After the driver is downloaded, scan the following code to program the scanner toemulate a regular RS232-based COM Port.

USB Serial

No extra configuration (e.g., baud rate) is necessary.
Note: If you scan the USB Serial barcode either with an older Honeywell serial driver, or no
driver installed, you may no longer be able to scan barcodes. If this happens, either
uninstall the older driver versions and install the latest driver, or delete the specificdevice entry in Device Manager.

18

Xenon XP User GuideCTS/RTS Emulation
CTS/RTS Emulation On* CTS/RTS Emulation Off

ACK/NAK Mode

ACK/NAK Mode On* ACK/NAK Mode Off

Verifone® Ruby Terminal
Scan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Verifone Ruby
terminal. This barcode sets the baud rate to 1200 bps and the data format to 8 data
bits, mark parity bit, 1 stop bit. It also adds a line feed (LF) suffix and programs thefollowing prefixes for each symbology:
Symbology

Prefix

UPC-A

A

UPC-E

A

EAN-8

FF

EAN-13F

Verifone Ruby Settings

Xenon XP User Guide

19

Gilbarco® Terminal
Scan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Gilbarco
terminal. This barcode sets the baud rate to 2400 bps and the data format to 7 data
bits, even parity, 2 stop bits. It also adds a carriage return (CR) suffix and programs
the following prefixes for each symbology:
Symbology

Prefix

UPC-A

A

UPC-E

E0

EAN-8

FF

EAN-13F

Gilbarco Settings

Honeywell Bioptic Aux Port
Scan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Honeywellbioptic scanner auxiliary port configuration. This barcode sets the baud rate to
38400 bps and the data format to 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.

Honeywell Bioptic Settings

Datalogic™ Magellan® Aux Port
Scan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Datalogic
Magellan auxiliary port configuration. This barcode sets the baud rate to 9600 bps
and the data format to 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.

Datalogic Magellan Settings

20

Xenon XP User Guide

Wincor Nixdorf Terminal
Scan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Wincor Nixdorf
terminal. This barcode sets the baud rate to 9600 bps and the data format to 8 data
bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.

Wincor Nixdorf Terminal Settings

Wincor Nixdorf Beetle™ Terminal
Scan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Wincor Nixdorf
Beetle terminal. The following prefixes are programmed for each symbology:
Symbology

PrefixSymbology

Prefix

Aztec Code

VInterleaved 2 of 5

I

CodabarN

MaxiCode

T

Code 93

L

MicroPDF417

S

Code 128K

PDF417

Q
U

Data MatrixR

QR CodeEAN-8

B

Straight 2 of 5 IATA H

EAN-13

A

UPC-A

A0

GS1 DataBar

E

UPC-E

C

GS1-128P

All other barcodes

M

Wincor Nixdorf Beetle Settings

Xenon XP User Guide

21

Wincor Nixdorf RS232 Mode A
Scan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Wincor Nixdorf
RS232 Mode A terminal. This barcode sets the baud rate to 9600 bps and the data
format to 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit. The following prefixes are programmed
for each symbology:
Symbology

PrefixSymbology

Prefix

Code 128

K

EAN-13A

Code 93

L

GS1-128

K

Codabar

N

Interleaved 2 of 5

I

UPC-A

A0

Straight 2 of 5 IATA

H

UPC-E

C

GS1 DataBar

E

EAN-8

B

All other barcodes

M

Wincor Nixdorf RS232 Mode A
Settings

Keyboard Country Layout
If your interface is USB Keyboard or Keyboard Wedge, your keyboard layout default
is a US keyboard. To change this layout, scan the appropriate Keyboard Country
barcode below. By default, national character replacements are used for thefollowing characters: # $ @ [ \ ] ^ ‘ { | } ~. Refer to the "ISO 2022/ISO 646
Character Replacements" on page A-304 to view the character replacements foreach country.

Keyboard Countries* United States

Albania

Azeri (Cyrillic)

Azeri (Latin)

22

Xenon XP User Guide

Keyboard Countries (Continued)
BelarusBelgium

BosniaBrazilBrazil (MS)

Bulgaria (Cyrillic)

Bulgaria (Latin)

Canada (French legacy)

Canada (French)

Canada (Multilingual)

Croatia

Czech

Xenon XP User Guide

23

Keyboard Countries (Continued)
Czech (Programmers)

Czech (QWERTY)

Czech (QWERTZ)

Denmark

Dutch (Netherlands)

Estonia

FaroeseFinlandFranceGaelicGermany

Greek

24

Xenon XP User Guide

Keyboard Countries (Continued)
Greek (220 Latin)

Greek (220)Greek (319 Latin)

Greek (319)

Greek (Latin)

Greek (MS)Greek (Polytonic)

Hebrew

Hungarian (101 key)

Hungary

Iceland

Irish

Xenon XP User Guide

25

Keyboard Countries (Continued)
Italian (142)

ItalyJapan ASCII

KazakhKyrgyz (Cyrillic)

Latin America

LatviaLatvia (QWERTY)

Lithuania

Lithuania (IBM)

Macedonia

Malta

26

Xenon XP User Guide

Keyboard Countries (Continued)
Mongolian (Cyrillic)

NorwayPolandPolish (214)Polish (Programmers)

Portugal

Romania

RussiaRussian (MS)Russian (Typewriter)

SCS

Serbia (Cyrillic)

Xenon XP User Guide

27

Keyboard Countries (Continued)
Serbia (Latin)

Slovakia

Slovakia (QWERTY)

Slovakia (QWERTZ)

Slovenia

Spain

Spanish variation

SwedenSwitzerland (French)

Switzerland (German)

Tatar

Turkey F

28

Xenon XP User Guide

Keyboard Countries (Continued)
Turkey Q

Ukrainian

United Kingdom

United States (Dvorak)United States (Dvorak left)

United States (Dvorak right)

United States (International)

Uzbek (Cyrillic)

Keyboard Wedge Modifiers
ALT Mode
If your barcode contains special characters from the extended ASCII chart, forexample, an e with an accent grave (è), you will use ALT Mode. (See Extended ASCII
Characters on page 301.)
Note: Scan the ALT mode barcode after scanning the appropriate Keyboard Country code.

Xenon XP User Guide29

If your keystrokes require the ALT key and 3 or 4 characters, scan the 3 Charactersor 4 Characters barcode. The data is then output with the special character(s) forvalues 00-255. Default = Off.

* Off

3 Characters

4 Characters

Keyboard Style
This programs keyboard styles, such as Caps Lock and Shift Lock. If you have used
Keyboard Conversion settings, they will override any of the following Keyboard
Style settings. Default = Regular.
Regular is used when you normally have the Caps Lock key off.

* Regular

Caps Lock is used when you normally have the Caps Lock key on.

Caps Lock

Shift Lock is used when you normally have the Shift Lock key on (not common to
U.S. keyboards).

Shift Lock30

Xenon XP User Guide

Automatic Caps Lock is used if you change the Caps Lock key on and off. The
software tracks and reflects if you have Caps Lock on or off. This selection can only
be used with systems that have an LED that notes the Caps Lock status (ATkeyboards).

Automatic Caps Lock

Autocaps via NumLock barcode should be scanned in countries (e.g., Germany,
France) where the Caps Lock key cannot be used to toggle Caps Lock. The
NumLock option works similarly to the regular Autocaps, but uses the NumLock
key to retrieve the current state of the Caps Lock.

Autocaps via NumLock

Emulate External Keyboard should be scanned if you do not have an external
keyboard (IBM AT or equivalent).

Emulate External Keyboard

Note: After scanning the Emulate External Keyboard barcode, you must power cycle yourcomputer.

Keyboard Conversion
Alphabetic keyboard characters can be forced to be all upper case or all lowercase.
So if you have the following barcode: “abc569GK,” you can make the output“ABC569GK” by scanning Convert All Characters to Upper Case, or to “abc569gk”
by scanning Convert All Characters to Lower Case.
These settings override Keyboard Style selections.
Note: If your interface is a keyboard wedge, first scan the menu code for Automatic Caps
Lock (page 31). Otherwise, your output may not be as expected.
Default = Keyboard Conversion Off.

* Keyboard Conversion Off

Xenon XP User Guide

31

Convert All Characters
to Upper Case

Convert All Charactersto Lower Case

Control Character Output
This selection sends a text string instead of a control character. For example, when
the control character for a carriage return is expected, the output would display[CR] instead of the ASCII code of 0D. Refer to ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page
1252) on page 300. Only codes 00 through 1F are converted (the first column ofthe chart). Default = Off.
Note: Control + X (Control + ASCII) Mode overrides this mode.

Control Character Output On* Control Character Output Off

Keyboard ModifiersThis modifies special keyboard features, such as CTRL+ ASCII codes and Turbo
Mode.
Control + X (Control + ASCII) Mode On: The scanner sends key combinations for
ASCII control characters for values 00-1F. Windows is the preferred mode. All
keyboard country codes are supported. DOS mode is a legacy mode, and it does
not support all keyboard country codes. New users should use the Windows mode.
Refer to ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), page 300 for CTRL+ X Values.
Windows Mode Prefix/Suffix Off: The scanner sends key combinations for ASCII
control characters for values 00-1F, but it does not translate prefix or suffix
information.
Support ALT 3 Digit HEX Mode: The scanner sends key combinations for ASCII
control characters for values 00-1F transmitted as the ALT key and 3 digits.

32

Xenon XP User Guide

Default = Control + X Mode Off.

Windows Mode Control + X
Mode On* Control + X Mode Off

DOS Mode Control + X Mode On

Windows Mode Prefix/Suffix

DOS Mode Control + X Mode On with
Windows Mode Prefix/Suffix

Supports ALT 3 Digit HEX Mode

Turbo Mode: The scanner sends characters to a terminal faster. If the terminal
drops characters, do not use Turbo Mode. Default = Off.

Turbo Mode On* Turbo Mode Off

Numeric Keypad Mode: Sends numeric characters as if entered from a numeric
keypad. Default = Off.

Numeric Keypad Mode On* Numeric Keypad Mode Off

Xenon XP User Guide

33

Automatic Direct Connect Mode: This selection can be used if you have an IBM AT
style terminal and the system is dropping characters. Default = Off.

Automatic Direct Connect
Mode On* Automatic Direct Connect
Mode OffRS232 Modifiers
RS232 Baud Rate
Baud Rate sends the data from the scanner to the terminal at the specified rate.
The host terminal must be set for the same baud rate as the scanner. Default =
115,200.

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

34

Xenon XP User Guide

1920038400

57,600* 115,200

RS232 Word Length: Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity
Data Bits sets the word length at 7 or 8 bits of data per character. If an application
requires only ASCII Hex characters 0 through 7F decimal (text, digits, andpunctuation), select 7 data bits. For applications that require use of the full ASCII
set, select 8 data bits per character. Default = 8.
Stop Bits sets the stop bits at 1 or 2. Default = 1.
Parity provides a means of checking character bit patterns for validity.
Default = None.

7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Even

7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity None

7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Odd

7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Even

7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity None

Xenon XP User Guide35

7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Odd

8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Even

* 8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity None

8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Odd

8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity MarkRS232 Receiver Time-Out
The unit stays awake to receive data until the RS232 Receiver Time-Out expires. A
manual or serial trigger resets the time-out. When an RS232 receiver is sleeping, acharacter may be sent to wake up the receiver and reset the time-out. A transaction
on the CTS line will also wake up the receiver. The receiver takes 300 milliseconds
to completely come up. Change the RS232 receiver time-out by scanning thebarcode below, then scanning digits from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311, then scanning Save. The range is 0 to 300 seconds. Default = 0 seconds(no time-out - always on).

RS232 Receiver Time-Out

RS232 Handshake
RS232 Handshaking allows control of data transmission from the scanner using
software commands from the host device. When RTS/CTS is turned Off, no data
flow control is used.
Flow Control, No Timeout: The scanner asserts RTS when it has data to send, andwill wait indefinitely for CTS to be asserted by the host.
Two-Direction Flow Control: The scanner asserts RTS when it is OK for the host totransmit. The host asserts CTS when it is OK for the device to transmit.

36

Xenon XP User Guide

Flow Control with Timeout: The scanner asserts RTS when it has data to send andwaits for a delay (see RS232 Timeout on page 37) for CTS to be asserted by thehost. If the delay time expires and CTS is not asserted, the device transmit buffer iscleared and scanning may resume. Default = RTS/CTS Off.

Flow Control, No Timeout

Two-Direction Flow Control

Flow Control with Timeout* RTS/CTS Off

RS232 Timeout
When using Flow Control with Timeout, you must program the length of the delay
you want to wait for CTS from the host. Set the length (in milliseconds) for atimeout by scanning the barcode below, then setting the timeout (from 1-5100
milliseconds) by scanning digits from the Programming Chart, beginning on page311, then scanning Save.

RS232 Timeout

XON/XOFF
Standard ASCII control characters can be used to tell the scanner to start sending
data (XON/XOFF On) or to stop sending data (XON/XOFF Off). When the hostsends the XOFF character (DC3, hex 13) to the scanner, data transmission stops.
To resume transmission, the host sends the XON character (DC1, hex 11). Datatransmission continues where it left off when XOFF was sent. Default = XON/XOFF
Off.

XON/XOFF On

Xenon XP User Guide37

* XON/XOFF Off

ACK/NAK
After transmitting data, the scanner waits for an ACK character (hex 06) or a NAK
character (hex 15) response from the host. If ACK is received, the communications
cycle is completed and the scanner looks for more barcodes. If NAK is received, thelast set of barcode data is retransmitted and the scanner waits for ACK/NAK again.
Turn on the ACK/NAK protocol by scanning the ACK/NAK On barcode below. To
turn off the protocol, scan ACK/NAK Off. Default = ACK/NAK Off.

ACK/NAK On* ACK/NAK Off

Scanner to Bioptic Communication
The following settings are used to set up communication between Honeywellscanners and bioptic scanners.
Note: The scanner’s baud rate must be set to 38400 and the RS232 timeout must be set to3000 in order to communicate with a bioptic scanner. See "RS232 Modifiers" on page34, and RS232 Timeout on page 37 for further information.

Scanner-Bioptic Packet Mode
Packet Mode On must be scanned to set the scanner’s format so it is compatible
with a bioptic scanner. Default = Packet Mode Off.

* Packet Mode Off

Packet Mode On

38

Xenon XP User Guide

Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Mode
Bioptic ACK/NAK On must be scanned so the scanner will wait for an ACK or NAK
from a bioptic scanner after each packet is sent. The Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK
Timeout (below) controls how long the scanner will wait for a response. Default =Bioptic ACK/NAK Off.

* Bioptic ACK/NAK Off

Bioptic ACK/NAK On

Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Timeout
This allows you to set the length (in milliseconds) for a timeout for a bioptic
scanner’s ACK/NAK response. Scan the barcode below, then set the timeout (from1-30,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311, then scanning Save. Default = 5100.

ACK/NAK Timeout

Xenon XP User Guide

39

40

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

3CORDLESS SYSTEM OPERATION

How the Cordless Charge Base/Access Point WorksA CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF or a CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF
cordless charge base or an Access Point provides the link between the cordlessscanner and the host system. The base/Access Point contains an interface
assembly and an RF communication module. The RF communication module
performs the data exchange between the cordless scanner and the interface
assembly. The control assembly coordinates the central interface activities
including: transmitting/receiving commands and data to/from the host system,
performing software activities (parameter menuing, visual indicator support,
power-on diagnostics), and data translation required for the host system.
The cordless charge base is also a scanner’s battery or charge pack charger. Refer
to Battery Recommendations, page 47, for additional information.

Link the Scanner to a Charge Base
Turn off power before connecting a base, then power up the computer once thebase is fully connected. When the base is connected and powered up, put thescanner in the base to establish a link. The green LED on the base flashes toindicate the scanner is charging.
If the scanner and base have previously been linked, you do not receive any
feedback. If this is the first time that the scanner and base are linked, both devices
emit a short chirp when their radios link. At this point, that one scanner is linked to
one base.
To determine if your scanner has linked to the base correctly, scan one of thesample barcodes beginning on page 309. If the scanner provides a single goodread beep and the green LED lights, the scanner has successfully linked to thebase. If you receive an error tone and the red LED lights, the scanner has not linked
to the base. Refer to page 295 for troubleshooting information.

Xenon XP User Guide

41

Link the Scanner to an Access Point
Note: Linking to an Access Point is only supported by Xenon XP 1952 models.
Turn on the computer (laptop/desktop). Plug the interface
cable into the Access Point first and then into theappropriate port on the computer. The page button lights up
when the connection to the host is made.

Page
ButtonScan the linking barcode on the top of the Access
Point to establish a connection between the Access
Point and the scanner. The scanner emits a short
beep and flashes the green LED to confirm aconnection with the Access Point. The Access Point’s
page button remains blue.

Replace a Linked Scanner
If you need to replace a broken or lost scanner that is linked to a base or an Access
Point, scan the Override Locked Scanner barcode below with a new scanner andplace that scanner in the base, or scan the Access Point linking barcode. The
locked link will be overridden, the broken or lost scanner’s link with the base or
Access Point will be removed, and the new scanner will be linked.

Override Locked Scanner(Single Scanner)

Communication Between the Cordless Systemand the Host
The cordless scanner provides immediate feedback in the form of a “good read”
indication with a green LED on the scanner and an audible beep. The scanner also
vibrates, if programmed to do so. This indicates that the barcode has been scanned
correctly and the base or Access Point has acknowledged receiving the data. This ispossible since the cordless system provides two-way communication between thescanner and the base or Access Point.

42

Xenon XP User Guide

When data is scanned, the data is sent to the host system via the base or Access
Point. The cordless scanner recognizes data acknowledgment (ACK) from the baseor Access Point. If it cannot be determined that the data has been properly sent tothe base or Access Point, the scanner issues an error indication. You must thencheck to see if the scanned data was received by the host system.

1. Scanner reads code and gets ACK from base or Access Point.
2. Base or Access Point sends data to host.

Program the Scanner and Base or Access Point
When using the scanner and charge base or Access Point together as a system,menu parameters and configuration settings are stored in the charge base or
Access Point. Therefore, when programming any menu configuration settings, thescanner must be linked to the intended charge base or Access Point.
Note: This only applies when the scanner is linked to a charge base or Access Point. If thescanner is in a non-base mode, configuration settings are stored in the scanner.

RF (Radio Frequency) Module Operation
The cordless system uses a two-way Bluetooth™ radio to transmit and receive data
between the scanner and the base or Access Point. Designed for point-to-point
and multi-point-to-single point applications, the radio operates using a license
free ISM band, which sends relatively small data packets at a fast data rate over aradio signal with randomly changing frequencies, makes the cordless system
highly responsive to a wide variety of data collection applications and resistant tonoisy RF environments. The CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF and CCB-H-010BT/
CCB-H-010BT-BF (Bluetooth Class 1 or Class 2) provide a communication range

Xenon XP User Guide43

of 328 feet (100m) or 33 feet (10m) between the scanner and base or Access Point,depending on the environment. See Flexible Power Management, page 62, for
information about controlling this range.

System Conditions
The components of the cordless system interact in specific ways as you associate ascanner to a base or Access Point, as you move a scanner out of range, bring ascanner back in range, or swap scanners between two cordless systems. The
following information explains the cordless system operating conditions.

Link Process
Once a scanner is placed into a cordless charge base, the scanner’s charge statusis checked, and software automatically detects the scanner and links it to the basedepending on the selected link mode.
Refer to Link the Scanner to an Access Point, page 42, for information about
linking to an Access Point.

Scanner Is Out of Range
The cordless scanner is in communication with its base or Access Point, even when
it is not transmitting barcode data. Whenever the scanner can’t communicate withthe base or Access Point for a few seconds, it is out of range. If the scanner is out ofrange and you scan a barcode, the scanner issues an error tone indicating nocommunication with the base or Access Point. A cordless charge base can also
sound an alarm. Refer to Out-of-Range Alarm, page 59.

Scanner Is Moved Back Into Range
The scanner relinks if the scanner or the base or Access Point have been reset, orthe scanner comes back into range. If the scanner relinks, you will hear a single
chirp when the relinking process (uploading of the parameter table) is complete.
Refer to Out-of-Range Alarm on page 59 for further information.

Out of Range and Back into Range with Batch Mode On
The scanner may store a number of symbols (approximately 500 U.P.C. symbols;
others may vary) when it is out of range and then send them to the base or Access
Point when back in range (see Batch Mode on page 63).
You will not hear a communication error tone in this mode, but you will hear a shortbuzz when you press the trigger if the radio communication is not working. Oncethe radio connection is made, the scanner produces a series of beeps while thedata is being transferred to the base or Access Point.

44

Xenon XP User Guide

Page Button
When you press the page button on the base or Access Point, the scanners
associated with that base or Access Point will begin beeping (3 short and 1 longbeep). If you press the trigger on a scanner that is beeping in response, or press thepage button on the base or Access Point a second time, all associated scanners willstop beeping. See Page on page 54 for further information about page button
settings.
Note: If you are using a Xenon XP 1950h model, refer to Quiet Operations - LED andVolume Settings on page 121 for additional Page Button settings.

Page Button and Presentation Modes

When in Streaming Presentation Mode, the scanner’s aimer goes out after a shorttime, but the scan illumination remains on all the time to continuously search forbarcodes (see Streaming Presentation™ Mode on page 96). When in Temporary
Streaming Presentation Mode, pressing the page button on the base puts thescanner into Streaming Presentation Mode until the timeout occurs. If a barcode isscanned before the timeout is reached, the timer starts over.
When the scanner is in the base, press the page button once to put the scanner
into Temporary Streaming Presentation Mode. When the scanner is in the base andthe base has external power (plugged into an outlet), press the page button twice
to put the scanner into Streaming Presentation Mode. Press it twice again to end
Streaming Presentation Mode. When the base does not have external power,pressing the page button twice does not trigger Streaming Presentation Mode.

Xenon XP User Guide

45

When the scanner is out of the base, the page button works normally. Default =Temporary Streaming Presentation Mode On.

* Temporary Streaming Presentation ModeOn

To remove Temporary Streaming Presentation Mode, scan the barcode for Page
Mode On page 54.

Temporary Streaming Presentation Timeout
Set a timeout for the length of time the illumination remains on and searching forbarcodes when using Temporary Streaming Presentation Mode. Set the length forthe timeout by scanning one of the barcodes below. Default = 10,000 ms (10seconds).

*10 Second Timeout

30 Second Timeout

Presentation Mode in the Base* Disabled

EnabledCharge Information
The battery or charge pack is designed to charge while the scanner is positioned in
the cordless base unit. Refer to Scanner Communication and Scanning, page 49,
for an interpretation of the Charge Status indicators. Refer to Charge Only Mode(page 57) if you need to charge a scanner without linking it to the base.

46

Xenon XP User Guide

Place the scanner in the base that is connected to an appropriate power supply.
Use only a Listed Limited Power Source (LPS) or Class 2 type power supply with
output rated 5 to 5.2Vdc, 1A.
Note: If you are powering the base through the interface cable (for example, a USB cable)
and not using an external power supply plugged into the aux port, the current
available for charging is reduced and charge times are increased.

Battery Information for the Xenon XP 1952g/1952hPower is supplied to the Xenon XP 1952g or 1952h scanner by a rechargeable
battery that is integrated in the scanner handle. Batteries are shipped only partiallycharged. The battery should be charged for a minimum of 4 hours before initial use
to ensure optimal performance.

Battery Recommendations•

The battery is a lithium ion cell and can be used without a full charge, and canalso be charged without fully discharging, without impacting the battery life.
There is no need to perform any charge/discharge conditioning on this type ofbattery.

•

Keep the base connected to power when the host is not in use.

•

Replace a defective battery immediately since it could damage the scanner.

•

Although your battery can be recharged many times, it will eventually be
depleted. Replace it after the battery is unable to hold an adequate charge.

•

If you are not sure if the battery or charger is working properly, send it to
Honeywell International Inc. or an authorized service center for inspection.
Refer to Customer Support on page xvii for additional information.

Caution: Use only Honeywell Li-ion battery packs, model number BATSCN05, rated 3.7 Vdc, 7.4Whr in this device. Use of any nonHoneywell battery may result in damage not covered by thewarranty.

Safety Precautions for Lithium Batteries•

Do not place batteries in fire or heat the batteries.

•

Do not store batteries near fire or other high temperature locations.

•

Do not store or carry batteries together with metal objects.

•

Do not expose batteries to water or allow the batteries to get wet.

•

Do not connect (short) the positive and negative terminals, of the batteries, toeach other with any metal object.

Xenon XP User Guide47

•

Do not pierce, strike or step on batteries or subject batteries to strong impacts orshocks.

•Do not disassemble or modify batteries.

Caution: Danger of explosion if batteries are incorrectly replaced.
Dispose of used batteries according to the recycle program forbatteries as directed by the governing agency for the country
where the batteries are to be discarded.

Proper Disposal of the Battery
When the battery has reached the end of its useful life, the battery
should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials
handler. Do not incinerate the battery or dispose of the battery withgeneral waste materials. You may send the scanner’s battery to us(postage paid). The shipper is responsible for complying with allfederal, state, and local laws and regulations related to the packing,labeling, manifesting, and shipping of spent batteries. Contact the Product Service
Department (page xvii) for recycling or disposal information. Since you may findthat your cost of returning the batteries is significant, it may be more cost effective
to locate a local recycle/disposal company.

Instant Charge Pack Information for the
Xenon XP 1952g-BF/Xenon XP 1952h-BF
Caution: A Xenon XP 1952-BF scanner can only be charged by CCB01010BT-BF or CCB-H-010BT-BF base. Use of any nonHoneywell power supply may result in damage not covered by
the warranty.
Power is supplied to the cordless scanner by a rechargeable instant charge packthat is integrated in the scanner handle. The instant charge pack must be charged
before initial use. When the scanner is not in use, return it to the base.

Beeper and LED Sequences and Meaning
The scanner contains LEDs on the rear of the unit that indicate linking status,
decoding state, and battery condition or instant charge pack condition. The basehas LEDs on the top of the unit that indicate its power up, communication, andbattery charge condition or instant charge pack condition.

48

Xenon XP User Guide

Scanner Communication and Scanning
The following feedback is provided by the scanner and indicates communicationand scanning status.
LED

Beeper

Cause

Green Flash1 BeepSuccessful communication or linking

Red, Blinking

Razz or Error Tone

Failed communication

Green Flash2 Beeps

Successful menu change

Red, Blinking

Razz or Error Tone

Unsuccessful menu change

Normal Operation

Menu Operation

Scanner Charge Pack Status
The following charge status feedback is provided by the scanner when the scanner
is out of the base and has been idle for 5 seconds.
Scanner LED

Scanner Beep

Charge Level

Yellow, 3 sets of flashes
repeated every 3 seconds

No beep

less than 15%

Red, 3 sets of flashes
repeated every 3 seconds

No beep

less than 5%

Red, 20 sets of rapid flashes

No beep

less than 2%

When the scanner is out of the base, you can manually initiate a charge level queryby pressing the scanner trigger 3-times in rapid succession (approx. 2 seconds).
The scanner provides the following feedback when a query is initiated.
Scanner LED

Scanner Beep

Charge Level

Red, 3 sets of quick flashes in a row

No beep

less than 15%

Yellow, 3 sets of quick flashes in a row

No beep

less than 5%

Green, 3 sets of quick flashes in a row

No beep

less than 2%

The following charge status feedback is provided by the scanner while the scanner
resides in the base.
Scanner LED

Scanner Beep

Charge Level

Red, 2 sets of flashes every 10 seconds

No beep

less than 20%

Yellow, 2 sets of flashes every 10 seconds

No beep

20% ~ 40%

Green, 2 sets of flashes every 10 seconds

No beep

greater than 40%

Green, steady on

No beep

100%

Xenon XP User Guide

49

Base/Access Point Communication and Scanning
The following feedback is provided by the base (red LED) or Access Point (blueLED) and indicates communication and scanning status.
LED

Communication ConditionOff

USB suspend

On continuously

Power on, system idle

Short blinks in multiple pulses. Occurs whiletransferring data to/from the RF module or
the Host port.

Receiving data

Base Power Communication Indicator
To display the power indicator on a base or an Access Point, scan the Base Power
Communication Indicator On barcode. To turn off the power indicator, scan the
Off barcode. Default = On.

* Base Power Communication
Indicator On

Base Power Communication
Indicator Off

Base Charge Status
When charging the base indicates the progress while the scanner resides in the
base.
LED

Charge Level

Approximate Expected
Scans (see note)Green On

100%

450

Green Slow Blink

50-99%

200

Green Fast Blink

30-50%

100

Yellow Fast Blink

0-30%

Charging, do not scanNote: The number of scans was measured with a clearly printed UPC code in good light. The
approximate number of scans varies with changes in label quality, Symbology, andenvironmental factors.

50

Xenon XP User Guide

Low Power Alerts
Note: Low Power Alerts are only supported by battery-free scanners Xenon XP 1952g-BF
and Xenon XP 1952h-BF.
Low power alerts allow you to customize battery-free scanner LEDs to flash indifferent patterns when the charge level is low. Use the barcodes that follow tocustomize the settings for the power range being configured, the number offlashes per alert, the interval between flashes, the number of alerts, and theinterval between alerts. The beeper can also be set to silent, or to sound with the
flash patterns.

Low Power Alert Range
Set the power range that will trigger a low power alert. Default = 10-30%.

*Low Power Alert 10-30%

Low Power Alert 10-50%

Low Power Alert Flash Number
You can program the battery-free scanner’s LEDs to flash up to 9 times for the low
power alert. If the Low Power Alert Beep (page 52) is on, a double beep will soundwith each flash. To set the number of low power flashes, scan the barcode below
and then scan a digit (1-9) barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311, then Save. Default = 3 flashes.

Low Power Alert Flash Number

Xenon XP User Guide

51

Interval Between Flashes
Set the length of time, in seconds, between the LED flashes for a low power alert. To
set the interval, scan the barcode below and then scan a digit (1-9) barcode fromthe Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 2 seconds
between flashes.

Interval Between Flashes

Low Power Alert Repeat
Set how many times you want the low power flash pattern (flashes and intervals) torepeat. To set the number, scan the barcode below and then scan a digit (1-5)
barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default= 1.

Low Power Alert Repeat

Interval Between Alerts
If you have set the Low Power Alert Repeat (page 52) to more than 1, you can set
the length of time, in seconds, between the low power alerts. To set this interval,
scan the barcode below and then scan a digit (10-120) barcode from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 10 seconds
between alerts.

Interval Between Alerts

Low Power Alert Beep
If you do not want the beeper to sound for a low power alert, scan the Low Power
Alert Beep Off barcode. Any low power alert settings will still flash the scanner
LEDs, whether or not the beeper sounds. Default = Low Power Alert Beep On.

Low Power Alert Beep Off

52

Xenon XP User Guide

*Low Power Alert Beep On

Reset Scanner
Scanning this barcode reboots the scanner and causes it to relink with the base or
Access Point.

Reset Scanner

Scan While in Base Cradle
If you want to be able to scan barcodes while the scanner is in the base cradle, scan
the Scan in Cradle On barcode below. If you want to only allow scanning when thescanner is out of the base cradle, scan Scan in Cradle Off. If you want the scanner
to shut down when in the base cradle, scan Shut Down Scanner in Cradle. Default
for CCB01-010BT = Scan in Cradle On. Default for CCB-H-010BT = Scan in Cradle
Off.

Scan in Cradle Off

Scan in Cradle On

Shut Down Scanner in Cradle

Base Charge Modes
When the base has both an external power supply (plugged into the auxiliary powerport) and a host interface cable, it will draw its power from the external power
supply. When the base does not have an external power supply, it draws its powerfrom the interface cable. However, the scanner charges more slowly from a hostinterface cable than if auxiliary power were available. Using the following
selections, you can specify whether the scanner is charged from power supplied via
the host interface cable.

Xenon XP User Guide

53

When Base Charge Off is selected, the scanner does not charge when the scanneris in the base cradle.
When External or Interface Cable Power is selected, the scanner charges from thebase’s external power supply, if there is one. If there is no external power supply tothe base, the scanner charges from the interface cable.
When External Power Only is selected, the scanner only charges from the base’s
external power supply. If there is no external power supply, the scanner does not
charge.
Note: If you are using a cordless charge base in Presentation Mode, External Power Onlyis the only setting available.
Default = External or Interface Cable Power.

Base Charge Off* External or Interface
Cable Power

External Power Only

Page
Page Mode
By default, the page button on the base or Access Point pages the scanners
associated with that base or Access Point. If you want the page button on your baseor Access Point to be disabled, scan the Page Mode Off barcode, below. When
Page Mode is off, the base or Access Point will no longer page scanners when the
button is pressed. The red LED on the base or blue LED on the Access Point willremain lit to indicate that page mode is off. (This light will go out when the button ispressed, then back on when it’s released.) Default = Page Mode On.
Note: If you are using a Xenon XP 1952h model, refer to Quiet Operations - LED andVolume Settings on page 121 for additional Page Button settings.

* Page Mode On

54

Xenon XP User Guide

Page Mode Off

Page Pitch
When you press the page button on the base or Access Point, the scanners
associated with that base or Access Point will begin beeping (see Page Button on
page 45). You can set the pitch of the paging beep for each scanner by scanningone of the following barcodes. Default = Low.

* Low (1000 Hz)

Medium (3250 Hz)

High (4200 Hz)

Error Indicators
Beeper Pitch - Base Error
The base can be configured to beep at a particular pitch when an error occurs,such as transmission problems to a host system. The beeper pitch codes modify
the pitch (frequency) of the error tone the base emits when there is an error. Default= Low.

* Low/Razz (250 Hz)

Medium (3250 Hz)

High (4200 Hz)

Xenon XP User Guide

55

Number of Beeps - Base Error
The number of beeps and LED flashes emitted by the base for an error condition
can be programmed from 1 - 9. For example, if you program this option to have fiveerror beeps, there will be five error beeps and five LED flashes in response to anerror. To change the number of error beeps, scan the barcode below and then scana digit (1-9) from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save.
Default = 1.

Number of Base Error Beeps/LED Flashes

Scanner Report
Scan the barcode below to generate a report for the connected scanners. The
report indicates the port, work group, scanner name, and address. To assign aname to your scanner, refer to Menu Command Syntax, page 241.

Scanner Report

Scanner Address
Scan the barcode below to determine the address of the scanner you are using.

Scanner Address

Base or Access Point Address
Scan the barcode below to determine the address of the base or Access Point you
are using.

Base Address

Scanner ModesYour scanner is capable of working in single scanner mode, multiple scannermode, or with Bluetooth devices other than the charge base or Access Point.

56

Xenon XP User Guide

Charge Only Mode
There may be times when you want to charge your scanner, but not link to the base.
For example, if a scanner is linked to an Access Point or other Bluetooth device andyou need to charge the scanner, but want to retain your existing link.
In order to program the base for Charge Only Mode, you must link a scanner to it.
Once the scanner is linked to the base, scan the Charge Only Mode barcode. Any
subsequent scanners placed in that base will charge without linking to it. The
scanner used to program the base remains linked to the base. To unlink thisscanner, scan Unlink Scanner on page 58.

Charge Only Mode

Note: When in Charge Only Mode, the scanner periodically wakes up and beeps. See PowerUp Beeper on page 83 to change this setting.

Charge and Link ModeIf you want to charge a scanner and link to the base, use Charge and Link Mode. If
the base is programmed for Charge Only Mode, you must link a scanner to it first inorder to program it for Charge and Link Mode. Scan the linking barcode on thebase to link the scanner, then scan Charge and Link Mode. Default = Charge and
Link Mode.

* Charge and Link Mode

Linked Modes
Locked Link Mode and Open Link Mode are the link modes that accommodate
different applications. Scan the appropriate barcodes included in the Open Link
and Locked Link Mode explanations that follow to switch from one mode toanother. Default = Open Link Mode.

Xenon XP User Guide

57

Locked Link Mode - Single Scanner
If you link a scanner to a base or an Access Point using the Locked Link Mode,other scanners are blocked from being linked if they are inadvertently placed into
the base, or if the Access Point linking barcode is scanned. If you do place a
different scanner into a base, it will charge the scanner, but the scanner will not belinked.

Locked Link Mode
(Single Scanner)

To use a different scanner, you need to unlink the original scanner by scanning theUnlink Scanner barcode. (See Unlink the Scanner, page 58.)

Open Link Mode - Single Scanner
When newly shipped or defaulted to factory settings, a scanner is not linked to abase or an Access Point. A link is established when the scanner is placed into abase, or an Access Point linking barcode is scanned. When in Open Link Mode, a
new link is established when a new scanner is placed in the base, or you scan an
Access Point linking barcode. Each time a scanner is placed into a base or scans an
Access Point linking barcode, the scanner becomes linked to the base or Accesspoint and the old scanner is unlinked.

* Open Link Mode
(Single Scanner)

Unlink the Scanner
If a base or an Access Point has a scanner linked to it, that scanner must be
unlinked before a new scanner can be linked. Once the previous scanner isunlinked, it will no longer communicate with the base or Access Point. To unlink thescanner from a base or an Access Point, scan the Unlink Scanner barcode below.

Unlink Scanner

58

Xenon XP User Guide

Override Locked Scanner
If you need to replace a broken or lost scanner that is linked to a base or an Access
Point, scan the Override Locked Scanner barcode below with a new scanner andplace that scanner in the base, or scan the Access Point linking barcode. The
locked link will be overridden; the broken or lost scanner’s link with the base or
Access Point will be removed, and the new scanner will be linked.

Override Locked Scanner(Single Scanner)

Out-of-Range Alarm
If your scanner is out range of the base, an alarm sounds from both your base andscanner. If your scanner is out range of an Access Point, an alarm sounds from justthe scanner. The alarm stops when the scanner is moved closer to the base or
Access Point, when the base or Access Point connects to another scanner, or when
the alarm duration expires. To activate the alarm options for the scanner or thebase and to set the alarm duration, scan the appropriate barcode below and then
set the time-out duration (from 0-3000 seconds) by scanning digits on the
Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 0 sec (no alarm).

Base Alarm Duration

Note: The Access Point does not have a base alarm.

Scanner Alarm Duration

Note: If you are out of range when you scan a barcode, you will receive an error tone even if
you do not have the alarm set. You receive the error tone because the data could not
be sent to the base or Access Point or the host.

Alarm Sound TypeYou may change the alarm type for the scanner or base by scanning theappropriate barcode below and then scanning a digit (0-7) barcode from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 0.

Xenon XP User Guide

59

The sounds are as follows:
SettingSound

0

3 long beeps, medium pitch

1

3 long beeps, high pitch2

4 short beeps, medium pitch3

4 short beeps, high pitch4

single chirps, medium pitch5

2 chirps, then 1 chirp, medium pitch6

single chirps, high pitch

7

2 chirps, then 1 chirp, high pitch

Base Alarm Type

Scanner Alarm Type

Scanner Power Time-Out Timer
When there is no activity within a specified time period, the scanner enters low
power mode. Scan the appropriate scanner power time-out barcode to change thetime-out duration (in seconds).
Note: Scanning zero (0) is the equivalent of setting no time-out.

60

Xenon XP User GuideIf there are no trigger pulls during the timer interval, the scanner goes into power
down mode. Whenever the trigger is enabled, the timer is reset. The scanner will not
go into power down mode when it is in the base and charging. Default = 3600
seconds.

0 seconds

200 seconds

400 seconds

900 seconds* 3600 seconds

7200 seconds

Note: When the scanner is in power down mode, press the trigger to power the unit back up.
There will be a set of power up beeps and a delay of up to a few seconds for the radio
to join. The scanner will then be ready to use.

Xenon XP User Guide

61

Flexible Power Management
If you are experiencing network performance issues, and suspect the scanner isinterfering with other devices, you can turn down the power output of the scanner.
This reduces the range between the scanner and a base or an Access Point asshown in the following illustration:

Scanner
802.11LAN

Reduced
Power
Full
Power

Xenon XP 1952g/1952hScan one of the barcodes below to set the scanner’s power output to Full Power(100%), Medium Power (35%), Medium Low Power (5%), or Low Power (1%).
Default = Full Power.
For Bluetooth Class 1 operation, use Medium Power or lower.
For Bluetooth Class 2 operation, use Full Power.
For BLE operation, use Medium Power.

* Full Power

Medium Power

Medium Low Power

Low Power

62

Xenon XP User Guide

Xenon XP 1952g-BF/1952h-BF
Scan one of the barcodes below to set the scanner’s power output to Full Power(100%), Medium High Power (87%), Medium Power (50%), or Low Power (1%).
Default = Full Power.

* Full Power

Medium High Power

Medium Power

Low Power

Batch Mode
Batch mode is used to store barcode data when a scanner is out of range of its baseor Access Point, or when performing inventory. The data is transmitted to the baseor Access Point once the scanner is back in range or when the records are manuallytransmitted.
Note: Batch Mode is only supported by the Honeywell Charge and Communication Base
(CCB) and Honeywell Access Point (AP). Batch mode has limitations when using
multiple scanners to one base or Access Point. If a cordless system is being used in“multiple link mode,” where up to 3 scanners are to be connected to one base or
Access Point, some accumulated or batched scans could be lost if scanners areconstantly being moved in and out of range.
Automatic Batch Mode stores barcode data when the scanner is out of range ofthe base or Access Point. The data is automatically transmitted to the base or
Access Point once the scanner is back in range. When the scanner’s buffer space isfull, any barcodes scanned generate an error tone. In order to scan barcodes again,
the scanner must be moved back into range of the base or Access Point so data canbe transmitted.
Inventory Batch Mode stores barcode data, whether or not you are in range of thebase or Access Point. To transmit the stored data to the base or Access Point, either
place the scanner in the base, or scan Transmit Inventory Records (page 68). When

Xenon XP User Guide63

the scanner’s buffer space is full, any barcodes scanned generate an error tone. In
order to scan barcodes again, the data must be transmitted to the base or Access
Point. Once the data is transmitted, it is cleared in the scanner.
Persistent Batch Mode is the same as Inventory Batch Mode, except that once thedata is transmitted to the base or Access Point, it is retained in the scanner. If you
want to transmit more than once, you can do so using this mode. In order to clear
the scanner’s buffer, you must scan Clear All Codes (see page 68).
Default = Batch Mode Off.

* Batch Mode Off

Automatic Batch Mode

Inventory Batch Mode

Persistent Batch Mode

Batch Mode Beep
When scanning in Inventory Batch Mode (page 64), the scanner beeps every time abarcode is scanned. When Batch Mode Beep is On, you will also hear a click wheneach barcode is sent to the host. If you do not want to hear these clicks, scan Batch
Mode Beep Off. Default = Batch Mode Beep On.

Batch Mode Beep Off* Batch Mode Beep On

Batch Mode Storage
When a scanner is storing data during a Batch Mode process, you can selectwhether the data is stored in Flash memory or in RAM.

64

Xenon XP User Guide

Flash Storage: The scanner writes any untransmitted data to flash memory prior to
powering down. The data will still be there when the scanner powers back up.
However, the scanner will power down, even with untransmitted data, if it reaches a
power down timeout or if the battery or charge pack power is very low.
RAM Storage: The scanner will not power down while it contains data that has notbeen transmitted to the base or Access Point, even if it reaches a power downtimeout. However, if the scanner runs out of power, it will power down and the data
will be lost.
Default = Flash Storage.

* Flash Storage

RAM Storage

Batch Mode Quantity
When in Batch Mode, you may wish to transmit the number of multiple barcodes
scanned, rather than a single barcode multiple times. For example, if you scan
three barcodes called XYZ with Batch Mode Quantity Off, when you transmit yourdata it will appear as XYZ three times. Using Batch Mode Quantity On and the
Quantity Codes (page 67), you could output your data as “XYZ, 00003” instead.
Note: If you wish to format your output, for example, place a CR or tab between the barcode
data and the quantity, refer to Data Format beginning on page 133.
Default = Batch Mode Quantity Off.

* Batch Mode Quantity Off

Batch Mode Quantity On

Enter Quantities
Quantity Codes (page 67) allow you to enter a quantity for the last item scanned,
up to 9999 (default = 1). Quantity digits are shifted from right to left, so if a fifth
digit is scanned, the first digit scanned is discarded and the second, third andfourth digits are moved to the left to accommodate the new digit.

Xenon XP User Guide

65

For example, if the Quantity 5 barcode is scanned after the quantity has been set to1234, then the 1 is dropped, the quantity will be 2345.
Example: Add a quantity of 5 for the last item scanned.
1. Scan the item's barcode.
2. Scan the quantity 5 barcode.
Example: Add a quantity of 1,500 for the last item scanned.
1. Scan the item's barcode.
2. Scan the quantity 1 barcode.
3. Scan the quantity 5 barcode.
4. Scan the quantity 0 barcode.
5. Scan the quantity 0 barcode.
Example: Change a quantity of 103 to 10.
To correct an incorrect quantity, scan the quantity 0 barcode to replace theincorrect digits, then scan the correct quantity barcodes.
1. Scan the quantity 0 barcode to change the quantity to 1030.
2. Scan the quantity 0 barcode to change the quantity to 0300.
3. Scan the quantity 1 barcode to change the quantity to 3001.
4. Scan the quantity 0 barcode to change the quantity to 0010.
Default = 1.

Quantity Codes

0

*1

2

3

66

Xenon XP User GuideQuantity Codes (Continued)
4

5

6

7

8

9

Batch Mode Output Order
When batch data is transmitted, select whether you want that data sent as FIFO
(first-in first-out), or LIFO (last-in first-out). Default = Batch Mode FIFO.

* Batch Mode FIFO

Batch Mode LIFO

Total Records
If you wish to output the total number of barcodes scanned when in Batch Mode,scan Total Records.

Xenon XP User Guide

67

Total Records

Delete Last CodeIf you want to delete the last barcode scanned when in Batch Mode, scan Delete
Last Code.

Delete Last Code

Clear All Codes
If you want to clear the scanner’s buffer of all data accumulated in Batch Mode,scan Clear All Codes.

Clear All Codes

Transmit Records to Host
If you are operating in Inventory Batch Mode (see Inventory Batch Mode on page64), you must scan the following barcode to transmit all the stored data to the hostsystem.

Transmit Inventory Records

68

Xenon XP User Guide

Batch Mode Transmit Delay
Sometimes when accumulated scans are sent to the host system, the transmissionof those scans is too fast for the application to process. To program a transmit
delay between accumulated scans, scan one of the following delays. Default = Off.
Note: In most cases, a short (250 ms (milliseconds)) delay is ideal, however, longer delays
may be programmed. Contact Technical Support (page xvii) for additional
information.

* Batch Mode Transmit Delay Off(No Delay)

Batch Mode Transmit Delay Short(250 ms)

Batch Mode Transmit Delay Medium(500 ms)

Batch Mode Transmit Delay Long
(1000 ms)

Multiple Scanner Operation
Note: Multiple Scanner Operation Mode allows you to link up to 3 scanners to one base or
Access Point. You cannot join an 8th scanner until you unlink one of the 7 scanners
or take a scanner out of range.
Note: A base can only have on Xenon XP 1952-BF scanner linked to it.
To put the scanner in multiple scanner mode, scan the barcode below. Once you
scan this barcode, the scanner is unlinked from the base or Access Point and must
either be placed into the base, or you must scan the Access Point linking barcode inorder to relink.

Multiple Scanner Operation

Xenon XP User Guide

69

Scanner Name
You may assign a name to each scanner you are using for identification purposes.
For example, you may want to have a unique identifier for a scanner that isreceiving imaging commands sent from the base or Access Point.
The default name is in the format “ScannerName_Model_SN_XXXXXXXXXX” If you
have more than one scanner linked to a base, and they all have the same name, thefirst scanner linked to the base receives commands. When renaming a series ofscanners with identical names, unlink all except one of the scanners from the base.
Perform the rename operation using either the barcodes on page 71, or by sending
the serial command :ScannerName:BT_NAMNewName. where ScannerName isthe current name of the scanner, and NewName is the new name for the scanner. If
you wish to change the names of additional scanners, link them one at a time andrepeat the :ScannerName:BT_NAMNewName. command for each scanner.

To rename scanners with sequential numeric names, scan the barcodes below.
Scan the Reset code after each name change and wait for the scanner to relink tothe base or Access Point before scanning a barcode to rename the next scanner.

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

70

Xenon XP User Guide

Reset

You may also scan the Scanner Name barcode below and scan a number for thescanner name. For example, if you wanted to name the linked scanner “312,” youwould scan the barcode below, scan the 3, 1, and 2 barcodes on the Programming
Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Scan the Reset barcode and wait for thescanner to relink to the base.

Scanner Name

Application Work Groups
Note: A base can only have on Xenon XP 1952-BF scanner linked to it.
Your cordless system can have up to 3 scanners linked to one base or Access Point.
You can also have up to 3 work groups. If you want to have all of the scanners’
settings programmed alike, you don’t need to use more than one work group. If you
want each scanner to have unique settings (e.g., beeper volume, prefix/suffix, data
formatter), then you may program each scanner to its own unique work group andmay program each scanner independently. For example, you might want to havemultiple work groups in a retail/warehouse application where you need to havedifferent data appended to barcodes used in the warehouse area versus the retailarea. You could assign all the scanners in the retail area to one work group andthose in the warehouse to another. Consequently, any desired changes to either theretail or warehouse area would apply to all scanners in that particular work group.
Honeywell’s online configuration tool, EZConfig-Scanning (page 238), makes it
easy for you to program your system for use with multiple scanners and multiple
work groups.
The scanner keeps a copy of the menu settings it is using. Whenever the scanner isconnected or reconnected to a base or an Access Point, the scanner is updatedwith the latest settings from the base or Access Point for its work group. The
scanner also receives menu setting changes processed by the base or Access
Point. If a scanner is removed from a base or an Access Point and placed intoanother base or linked to another Access Point, it will be updated with the newbase/Access Point settings for whatever work group to which that the scanner waspreviously assigned. For example, if the scanner was in work group 1 linked to thefirst base, it will be placed in work group 1 in the second base with the associatedsettings.

Xenon XP User Guide

71

Application Work Group Selection
This programming selection allows you to assign a scanner to a work group by
scanning the barcode below. You may then program the settings (e.g., beeper
volume, prefix/suffix, data formatter) that your application requires. Default =Group 0.

* Group 0

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

Group 6

Reset the Factory Defaults: All Application Work Groups
The following barcode defaults all of the work groups to the factory default
settings.
PAPDFT&
Factory Default Settings:
All Work Groups

72

Xenon XP User GuideTo see what the factory default settings are, refer to the table of Menu Commands,
beginning on page 246. The standard product default settings for each of thecommands are indicated by an asterisk (*).
Note: Scanning this barcode also causes both the scanner and the base or Access Point toperform a reset and become unlinked. The scanner must be placed in the base, or theAccess Point linking barcode must be scanned to re-establish the link. Refer to
Scanner Modes, page 56 for additional information.
If your scanner is in multiple scanner mode, you will hear up to 30 seconds of beeping
while all scanners are relinked to the base or Access Point and the settings arechanged.

Reset the Custom Defaults: All Application Work Groups
If you want the custom default settings restored to all of the work groups, scan the
Custom Product Default Settings barcode below. (If there are no custom defaults,
it will reset the work groups to the factory defaults.) See Set Custom Defaults on
page 13 for further information about custom defaults.

Custom Default Settings:
All Work Groups

Note: Scanning this barcode also causes both the scanner and the base or Access Point toperform a reset and become unlinked. The scanner must be placed in its base, or theAccess Point linking barcode must be scanned to re-establish the link. Refer to
Scanner Modes, page 56 for additional information.
If your scanner is in multiple scanner mode, you will hear up to 30 seconds of beeping
while all scanners are relinked to the base or Access Point and the settings arechanged.

Use the Scanner with Bluetooth Devices
The scanner can be used either with the charge base, an Access Point, or with otherBluetooth devices. Those devices include personal computers, laptops, PDAs, andHoneywell mobility systems devices.

Bluetooth Secure Simple Pairing (SSP)
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) allows you to connect simply and securely to otherBluetooth devices without having to enter a PIN code (as described in Bluetooth
HID Keyboard Connect procedure). SSP is only available when using Bluetooth

Xenon XP User Guide73

version 2.1 or higher. When SSP is on, no PIN is required for pairing. Turn SSP off if
you are connecting to a Bluetooth device that is not using a compatible Bluetoothversion. Default = Bluetooth SSP On.

* Bluetooth SSP On

Bluetooth SSP Off

Bluetooth HID Keyboard Connect
Your scanner can be paired with Bluetooth-capable devices, such as personal
computers, laptops, and tablets, so that scanned data appears on your device
screen as though it was entered on the keyboard. In order to pair with the Bluetooth
device:1. Scan the appropriate Bluetooth HID Keyboard Connect barcode below.

Bluetooth HID Keyboard
Connect

Bluetooth HID Japanese
Keyboard Connect

2. Set your personal computer, laptop or tablet so it searches for other Bluetooth
devices. (Refer to your device’s User Guide for pairing instructions.)
3. Select the scanner name on your device. Some devices will automatically pairwith the scanner. If your device pairs automatically with the scanner, it displays
a successful pairing message and you do not need to continue to the next step.
4. If your device does not automatically pair with the scanner, a PIN is displayed.
This PIN must be scanned within 60 seconds. Quickly scan Bluetooth PIN
Code below, then scan the numeric barcode(s) for the PIN code from the chart
below, then scan Save.

Bluetooth PIN Code74

Xenon XP User Guide

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Save

Xenon XP User Guide

75

Virtual Keyboard
Once your scanner has been connected directly to an iPad, smart phone, or laptop,
you can toggle the virtual keyboard on your device with a quick double pull of thescanner trigger.

Bluetooth HID Keyboard Disconnect
If your scanner has been connected directly to an iPad, smart phone, or laptop, youmust disconnect it in order to once again communicate with the base or Access
Point. Scan the Bluetooth HID Keyboard Disconnect barcode to unlink thescanner from the currently linked host. Scan the linking barcode on the base or
Access Point to relink the scanner.

Bluetooth HID Keyboard Disconnect

Pair with Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) Devices
Use the following codes to connect to Bluetooth low energy devices. Scan HID BLE
Connect to connect the scanner to Bluetooth Low Energy HID devices. Scan Serial
BLE Connect to establish two-way communication between the scanner andBluetooth Low Energy serial devices.

HID BLE Connect

Serial BLE Connect

Bluetooth Serial Port - PCs/Laptops
Scanning the Non-Base BT Connection barcode below unlinks your scanner andputs it into a discoverable state. Once the scanner searches for and connects witha Bluetooth host, the scanner stores the connection to the host device address andswitches virtual COM ports. This allows the scanner to automatically relink to thehost if the connection is lost.

Non-Base BT Connection

76

Xenon XP User Guide

PDAs/Mobility Systems Devices
You may also use the scanner with a PDA or a Honeywell Mobility Systems device.
Scan the barcode below and follow the instructions supplied with your Bluetooth
device to locate the scanner, and connect with it.

BT Connection - PDA/Mobility Systems Device

Change the Scanner’s Bluetooth PIN CodeSome devices require a PIN code as part of the Bluetooth security features. Your
scanner’s default PIN is 1234, which you may need to enter the first time youconnect to your PDA or PC. The PIN code must be between 1 and 16 characters. Tochange the PIN, scan the barcode below and then scan the appropriate numericbarcodes from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save.

Bluetooth PIN

Minimize Bluetooth/ISM Band Network Activity
The settings described below can help you customize the relinking behavior of thecordless area-imaging system to obtain the best compromise between
convenience and low interference.
Note: ISM band refers to the 2.4 to 2.48 GHz frequency band used by wireless networks,
cordless phones, and Bluetooth.

Auto Reconnect Mode
Auto Reconnect controls whether or not the scanner automatically begins therelink process when a loss of connection is detected. When the Auto Reconnect On
barcode is scanned, the scanner begins the relink process immediately, without
user intervention. Default = Auto Reconnect On.

* Auto Reconnect On

Auto Reconnect Off

Xenon XP User Guide

77

The table below shows the results of the Auto Reconnect On and Off settings:
Event

Auto Reconnect On

Auto Reconnect Off

Scanner out of range

Relink occurs automatically. If
maximum number of link attempts
is unsuccessful, then the scannermust be relinked by either pulling
the trigger, placing the scanner inthe base, or scanning the Access
Point linking barcode. (SeeMaximum Link Attempts on page78.)

The scanner is relinked bypulling the trigger, or scanning
the Access Point linking
barcode.

Base or Access point reset(firmware upgrade or power
cycle)

Scanner behaves as if out of range.

No attempt to relink madewhile base or Access Point is
powered off. Trigger must be
pulled to initiate relinking.

Scanner power down due toPower Time-Out Timersetting

Trigger must be pulled, Access Point linking barcode must be
scanned, or the scanner must be placed in the base unit to relink.
(Note: Scanner relinks on power up, but powers on due to one of theabove actions.)

Scanner reset due tofirmware upgrade

Relink occurs automatically.

Scanner reset due to battery
or charge pack change

Relink occurs automatically.

Scanner placed in different
base unit

Relink to new base occurs automatically.

Maximum Link Attempts
The Maximum Link Attempts setting controls the number of times the scannertries to form a connection with a base or an Access Point. During the connection
setup process, the scanner transmits in order to search for and connect to a baseor an Access Point. In order to prevent continuous transmissions that could
interfere with other users of the ISM band, the number of attempts to connect islimited by this setting. After the maximum number of attempts is reached, thescanner will not attempt to reconnect to a base or an Access Point. Pressing thetrigger, scanning an Access Point linking barcode, or placing the scanner in thecradle resets the attempt count and the scanner will again try to link.
Scan the Maximum Link Attempts barcode, then scan the number of attempts forthe setting (from 0-100) from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311,
then Save. Default = 0.

Maximum Link Attempts

Note: When Auto Reconnect Mode is On, setting Maximum Link Attempts to zero will cause
the scanner to try to link until the Power Time-Out Timer setting expires. When Auto
Reconnect Mode is Off, setting Maximum Link Attempts to zero will cause thescanner to only attempt linking one time after a trigger press.

78

Xenon XP User GuideRelink Time-Out
Relink Time-Out controls the idle time between relink attempts. An attempt to linka scanner to a base or an Access Point typically lasts up to 5 seconds. This is thetime when the scanner is actually attempting a contact. Relink Time-Out controls
the amount of time, in seconds, that elapses between the end of one connection
attempt and the start of the next.
Note: The length of time for an attempt depends on the number of scanners connected toa base unit or Access Point. An extra 7 seconds may be required when a connection is
successful.
Scan the Relink Time-Out barcode, then scan the number of seconds for thesetting (from 1-100) from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, thenSave. Default = 3 seconds.

Relink Time-Out

Bluetooth/ISM Network Activity Examples
Default values
When the scanner goes out of range, the scanner repeatedly attempts to connect
to the base unit or Access Point. Each attempt consists of approximately 5 secondsof active time followed by 3 seconds of idle time. After one hour, the scanner
powers off and batch mode data is lost.
Example: Maximum Link Attempts set to 15
Other values at default setting
When the scanner goes out of range, 15 attempts are made to link to the base unitor Access Point. Each attempt consists of approximately 5 seconds of active time
followed by 3 seconds of idle time. After 15 cycles (8*15 =120), or about 2 minutes,
the scanner stops trying to connect to the base or Access Point, but retains any
barcodes that may have been saved in batch mode. After one hour, the scanner
powers off and batch mode data is lost.
Example: Auto Reconnect Mode set to 0
Maximum Link Attempts set to 15
Other values at default setting
When the scanner goes out of range, no action is taken to relink. When the trigger
is pulled, 15 attempts are made to link to the base or Access Point. Each attempt
consists of approximately 5 seconds of active time followed by 3 seconds of idle
time. After 15 cycles (8*15 =120), or about 2 minutes, the scanner stops trying toconnect to the base or Access Point, but retains any barcodes that may have been

Xenon XP User Guide79

saved in batch mode. After one hour, the scanner powers off and batch mode data
is lost. Refer to Auto Reconnect Mode, page 77, to review other events that canstart the relink process.
Example: Auto Reconnect Mode set to 1
Maximum Link Attempts set to 0
Relink Time-Out set to 10
Scanner Power Time-Out Timer set to 1800
Note: See Scanner Power Time-Out Timer on page 60.
The scanner attempts to connect to the base or Access Point every 15 seconds,
measured from one attempt start to the next attempt start. After one half hour, thescanner powers off.

Host Acknowledgment
Some applications require that the host terminal (or server) validate incoming
barcode data (database look-up) and provide acknowledgment to the scanner
whether or not to proceed. In Host ACK Mode, the scanner waits for thisacknowledgment after each scan. Visual and audible acknowledgments provide
valuable feedback to the scan operator. The Host ACK functionality is controlled via
a number of pre-defined escape commands that are sent to the scanner to make it
behave in different ways.
Note: System performance degrades when using Host ACK at rates lower than 9600 baud.
The following criteria must be met for the Host ACK to work correctly:•

The cordless system must be configured for Host Port RS232 (terminal ID = 000)or USB COM Emulation (terminal ID = 130).

•

RTS/CTS is defaulted off. You must enable it if the host system requires it.

•

Host ACK must be set to On (page 81).

•

A comma must be used as a terminator.

•

The host terminal software must be capable of interpreting the barcode data,
make decisions based on the data content, and send out appropriate escapecommands to the scanner.

Escape commands are addressed to the scanner via “Application Work Groups.”
Once a command is sent, all scanners in a group respond to that command.
Because of this, it is recommended that each scanner is assigned to its own groupin Host ACK mode.

80

Xenon XP User Guide

The commands to which the scanner responds are listed on page 82. The [ESC] is a
1B in hex. A typical command string is y [ESC] x, where “y” is the application workgroup number, “[ESC] x” is the escape command, and the comma is the terminator,
which is required. (When “y” is not specified, the command is sent to the default
Application Work Group 0.)
Example: Commands may be strung together to create custom response sequences. An
example of a command string is listed below.
[ESC]4,[ESC]5,[ESC]6,
The above example will make a scanner that is in application work group zero beep
low, then medium, then high.
Example: A good read beep is required for any item on file, but a razz or error tone is required
if the item is not on file. In this case,[ESC]7, is sent from the host to the scanner for an on-file product[ESC]8,[ESC]8, is sent from the host to the scanner for a not-on-file product
When a barcode is scanned, the scanner enters a timeout period until either thehost ACK sequence is received, or the timeout expires (in 10 seconds, by default).
Once Host ACK is enabled, the system works as follows when a barcode is scanned:•

The scanner reads the code and sends data to the base or Access Point totransmit to the host system. No audible or visual indication is emitted until thescanner receives an escape command. The scanner read illumination goes out
when there’s a successful read.

•

Scanner operation is suspended until 1) a valid escape string is received fromthe host system or 2) the scanner times out.

•

Once condition 1 or 2 above has been met, the scanner is ready to scan again,
and the process repeats.

A time-out occurs if the scanner does not receive a valid escape command within
10 seconds. A time-out is indicated by an error tone. If a time-out occurs, theoperator should check the host system to understand why a response to thescanner was not received.

Host ACK On/Off

Host ACK On* Host ACK Off

Xenon XP User Guide

81

Host ACK Timeout
You can set a timeout for the length of time the scanner waits for a valid escapecommand when using Host Acknowledgment Mode. Set the length (in seconds) fora timeout by scanning the following barcode, then setting the timeout (from 1-90
seconds) by scanning digits from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311,
then Save. Default = 10.

Host ACK Timeout

Host ACK Responses

82

Command

Action[ESC] a,Double beeps to indicate a successful menu change was made.

[ESC] b,Razz or error tone to indicate a menu change was unsuccessful.

[ESC] 1,

The green LED illuminates for 135 milliseconds followed by a pause.

[ESC] 2,

The green LED illuminates for 2 seconds followed by a pause.

[ESC] 3,

The green LED illuminates for 5 seconds followed by a pause.

[ESC] 4,

Emits a beep at a low pitch.

[ESC] 5,

Emits a beep at a medium pitch.

[ESC] 6,

Emits a beep at a high pitch.

[ESC] 7,

Beeps to indicate a successful decode and communication to host.

[ESC] 8,[ESC] 8,

Razz or error tone to indicate a decode/communication to host was
unsuccessful.

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

4INPUT/OUTPUT SETTINGSPower Up Beeper
The scanner can be programmed to beep when it’s powered up. If you are using acordless system, the base can also be programmed to beep when it is powered up.
Scan the Off barcode(s) if you don’t want a power up beep. Default = Power Up
Beeper On - Scanner.

Power Up Beeper Off Scanner* Power Up Beeper On Scanner

Power Up Beeper Off Cordless BasePower Up Beeper On Cordless Base

Xenon XP User Guide

83

Beep on BEL Character
You may wish to force the scanner to beep upon a command sent from the host. If
you scan the Beep on BEL On barcode below, the scanner will beep every time a
BEL character is received from the host. Default = Beep on BEL Off.

*Beep on BEL Off

Beep on BEL On

Trigger Click
To hear an audible click every time the scanner trigger is pressed, scan the Trigger
Click On barcode below. Scan the Trigger Click Off code if you don’t wish to hear
the click. (This feature has no effect on serial or automatic triggering.) Default =Trigger Click Off.

*Trigger Click Off

Trigger Click On

Good Read and Error Indicators
Beeper – Good Read
The beeper may be programmed On or Off in response to a good read. Turning thisoption off only turns off the beeper response to a good read indication. All error andmenu beeps are still audible. Default = Beeper - Good Read On.

Beeper - Good Read Off* Beeper - Good Read On

84

Xenon XP User Guide

Beeper Volume – Good Read
The beeper volume codes modify the volume of the beep the scanner emits on agood read. Default = High for Xenon XP, Low for Xenon XP healthcare scanners.

* Low

Medium* HighOff

Beeper Pitch – Good Read
The beeper pitch codes modify the pitch (frequency) of the beep the scanner emits
on a good read. Default = Medium.

Low (1600 Hz)* Medium (2700 Hz)

High (4200 Hz)

Xenon XP User Guide

85

Vibrate – Good Read
The scanner vibrates once when a barcode is successfully read, and twice when aprogramming barcode is successfully read. When a programming barcode isunsuccessful, the scanner emits one long vibration (2 times the Vibrate Duration
length). Scan Vibrate - Good Read Off to keep the scanner from vibrating. Default= Vibrate - Good Read Off.

* Vibrate- Good Read Off

Vibrate- Good Read On

Vibrate Duration
If you want to set the length for the good read vibration, scan the barcode below,
then set the duration (from 100 - 2,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 100 ms.

Vibrate Duration

Beeper Pitch – Error
The beeper pitch codes modify the pitch (frequency) of the sound the scanneremits when there is a bad read or error. Default = Razz.

* Razz (250 Hz)

Medium (3250 Hz)

High (4200 Hz)

86

Xenon XP User Guide

Beeper Duration – Good Read
The beeper duration codes modify the length of the beep the scanner emits on agood read. Default = Normal.

* Normal Beep

Short Beep

LED – Good Read
The LED indicator can be programmed On or Off in response to a good read.
Default = On.

* LED - Good Read On

LED - Good Read Off

Number of Beeps – Good Read
The number of beeps of a good read can be programmed from 1 - 9. The same
number of beeps will be applied to the beeper and LED in response to a good read.
For example, if you program this option to have five beeps, there will be five beeps
and five LED flashes in response to a good read. The beeps and LED flashes are insync with one another. To change the number of beeps, scan the barcode below
and then scan a digit (1-9) barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311, then Save. Default = 1.

Number of Good Read Beeps/LED Flashes

Number of Beeps – Error
The number of beeps and LED flashes emitted by the scanner for a bad read or
error can be programmed from 1 - 9. For example, if you program this option tohave five error beeps, there will be five error beeps and five LED flashes in response

Xenon XP User Guide87

to an error. To change the number of error beeps, scan the barcode below and thenscan a digit (1-9) barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311,
then Save. Default = 1.

Number of Error Beeps/LED Flashes

Good Read Delay
This sets the minimum amount of time before the scanner can read anotherbarcode. Default = 0 ms (No Delay).

* No Delay

Short Delay (500 ms)

Medium Delay (1,000 ms)

Long Delay (1,500 ms)

User-Specified Good Read Delay
If you want to set your own length for the good read delay, scan the barcode below,
then set the delay (from 0 - 30,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save.

User-Specified Good Read Delay

88

Xenon XP User Guide

Trigger Modes
Manual Trigger
When in manual trigger mode, the scanner scans until a barcode is read, or until
the trigger is released. Two modes are available, Normal and Enhanced. Normal
mode offers good scan speed and the longest working ranges (depth of field).
Enhanced mode will give you the highest possible scan speed but slightly lessrange than Normal mode. Enhanced mode is best used when you require a very
fast scan speed and don’t require a long working range. Default = Manual TriggerNormal.

* Manual Trigger - Normal

Manual Trigger Enhanced

Trigger Toggle
Trigger Toggle mode lets you quickly hit the trigger two or three times to put thescanner into either imaging mode or centering mode, then toggle back toscanning. So, like a double-click with a mouse, you can control what the next
scanner’s action will be. For example, you could double-press the trigger to go into
imaging mode, then the next trigger press takes the image. The scanner thenreverts to scanning mode. Use the following codes to configure what action you
would like the scanner to take when in Trigger Toggle mode.

*Trigger Toggle Off

Trigger Toggle - Image Capture

Trigger Toggle - Centering

Xenon XP User Guide

89

Trigger NumberThis sets the number of trigger presses required to activate the Trigger Toggle
Mode.

2 Quick Triggers

3 Quick Triggers

4 Quick Triggers

Trigger TimingThis sets the timing of the trigger presses in order to qualify as a trigger toggle,
rather than a regular trigger press. After scanning the Trigger Timing barcode, set
the time-out duration (from 50-2,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 400ms.

Trigger Timing

Trigger Toggle Timeout
This sets the length of time the scanner stays in trigger toggle mode before
reverting to scan mode. After scanning the Trigger Toggle Timeout barcode, set
the time-out duration (from 0 to 65 seconds) by scanning digits from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 5 seconds.
Note: If this is set to 0, you must repeat the toggle sequence to return to the default
scanning mode. For example, if 2 quick trigger presses puts the scanner into
centering mode and the Trigger Timing is 0, you would have to do 2 quick presses
again to go back to the default scanning mode.

Trigger Toggle Timeout

90

Xenon XP User Guide

Serial Trigger
You can activate the scanner either by pressing the trigger, or using a serial trigger
command (see Trigger Commands on page 244). You must be in a serial interface
mode in order to use serial triggering. Refer to RS232 Serial Port (page 16) or USB
Serial (page 18) for further information. When in serial mode, the scanner scans
until a barcode has been read or until the deactivate command is sent. The scanner
can also be set to turn itself off after a specified time has elapsed (see Read TimeOut, which follows).

Read Time-Out
Use this selection to set a time-out (in milliseconds) of the scanner’s trigger whenusing serial commands to trigger the scanner. Once the scanner has timed out, you
can activate the scanner either by pressing the trigger or using a serial trigger
command. After scanning the Read Time-Out barcode, set the time-out duration(from 0-300,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 30,000 ms.

Read Time-Out

Presentation Mode
Presentation Mode uses ambient light and scanner illumination to detectbarcodes. When in Presentation Mode, the LEDs remain dim until a barcode ispresented to the scanner, then the aimer turns on and the LEDs turn up to read thecode. If the light level in the room is not high enough, Presentation Mode may notwork properly
Note: If you are using a cordless charge base in Presentation Mode, the battery will not
charge unless the power supply is plugged into the base’s auxiliary power port.
Scan the following barcode to program your scanner for Presentation Mode.

Presentation Mode

Xenon XP User Guide

91

Triggered Presentation Mode
This mode uses light to detect the presence of an object. Default = Ambient andScanner Light.

Ambient Light Only

*Ambient and Scanner Light

Presentation LED Behavior after Decode
When a scanner is in presentation mode, the LED aimer dims 30 seconds after abarcode is decoded. If you wish to dim the LED aimer immediately after a barcode
is decoded, scan the LEDs Off barcode, below. Default = LEDs On.

* LEDs On

LEDs Off

Presentation Centering
Use Presentation Centering to narrow the scanner’s field of view when it is in thestand to make sure the scanner reads only those barcodes intended by the user.
For instance, if multiple codes are placed closely together, Presentation Centering
will insure that only the desired codes are read.
Note: To adjust centering when the scanner is hand-held, see Centering (page 4-102).
If a barcode is not touched by a predefined window, it will not be decoded or output
by the scanner. If Presentation Centering is turned on by scanning Presentation
Centering On, the scanner only reads codes that pass through the centering
window you specify using the Top of Presentation Centering Window, Bottom ofPresentation Centering Window, Left, and Right of Presentation Centering
Window barcodes.
In the example below, the white box is the centering window. The centering window
has been set to 20% left, 30% right, 8% top, and 25% bottom. Since Barcode 1
passes through the centering window, it will be read. Barcode 2 does not passthrough the centering window, so it will not be read.

92

Xenon XP User Guide

0%

Barcode 1

10

Barcode 2

20

30

40
50

60

70

80

90

100
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100%

Note: A barcode needs only to be touched by the centering window in order to be read. It
does not need to pass completely through the centering window.
Scan Presentation Centering On, then scan one of the following barcodes tochange the top, bottom, left, or right of the centering window. Then scan thepercent you want to shift the centering window from the Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311, then Save. Default Presentation Centering = 40% for Top
and Left, 60% for Bottom and Right.

Presentation Centering On* Presentation Centering Off

Top of Presentation
Centering Window

Bottom of Presentation
Centering Window

Xenon XP User Guide

93

Left ofPresentation Centering
Window

Right of Presentation
Centering Window

In-Stand Sensor Mode
Note: The In-Stand Sensor feature only applies to Xenon XP 1950g, 1950h, 1952g, and1952h products. It does not apply to the Xenon XP 1952-BF products.
This feature senses when the scanner is removed from the stand and tells it tobegin manual triggering. When Sensor On is enabled, the scanner defaults to
Streaming Presentation Mode when it is in the stand, and to Manual Trigger Modewhen it is removed from the stand. Default = Sensor On.

* Sensor On

Sensor Off

Note: If you are taking images (see Imaging Commands beginning on page 217), you must
set the In-Stand Sensor to Off.

Poor Quality Codes
Poor Quality 1D Codes
This setting improves the scanner’s ability to read damaged or badly printed linear
barcodes. When Poor Quality 1D Reading On is scanned, poor quality linear
barcode reading is improved, but the scanner’s snappiness is decreased, making it
less aggressive when reading good quality barcodes. This setting does not affect
2D barcode reading. Default = Poor Quality 1D Reading Off.

Poor Quality 1D Reading On

94

Xenon XP User Guide

* Poor Quality 1D Reading Off

Poor Quality PDF Codes
This setting improves the scanner’s ability to read damaged or badly printed PDF
codes by combining information from multiple images. It is useful when acomplete barcode cannot be seen in one image. This setting does not affect 1D
barcode reading. Default = Poor Quality PDF Reading On.

*Poor Quality PDF Reading On

Poor Quality PDF Reading Off

Low Resolution PDF Codes
This setting improves the scanner’s ability to read low resolution PDF codes. When
Low Resolution PDF Codes On is scanned, poor quality PDF code reading is
improved, but the scanner’s snappiness is decreased, making it less aggressive
when reading good quality barcodes. This setting does not affect 1D barcode
reading. Default = Low Resolution PDF Codes Off.

Low Resolution PDF Codes On* Low Resolution PDF Codes
Off

Xenon XP User Guide95

CodeGate™
When CodeGate is On, the trigger is used to allow decoded data to be transmitted
to the host system. The scanner remains on, scanning and decoding barcodes, but
the barcode data is not transmitted until the trigger is pressed. When CodeGate isOff, barcode data is transmitted when it is decoded. Default = CodeGate Off Out-ofStand.

* CodeGate Off
Out-of-Stand

CodeGate On
Out-of-Stand

Streaming Presentation™ Mode
When in Streaming Presentation mode, the scanner’s aimer goes out after a shorttime, but the scan illumination remains on all the time to continuously search forbarcodes. Two modes are available, Normal and Enhanced. Normal mode offers
good scan speed and the longest working ranges (depth of field). Enhanced mode
will give you the highest possible scan speed but slightly less range than Normal
mode. Enhanced mode is best used when you require a very fast scan speed anddon’t require a long working range.

Streaming Presentation
Mode - Normal

Streaming Presentation
Mode - Enhanced

When using Preferred Symbology (page 4-104), a lower priority symbol must be
centered on the aiming pattern to be read in Streaming Presentation Mode.
Note: If you are using a cordless charge base, it must have an external power supply
plugged into the aux port for Streaming Presentation to work properly.

96

Xenon XP User Guide

Streaming Presentation In-Stand
This option is available when using In-Stand Sensor Mode, page 94. You may
program a specific Streaming Presentation Mode for in-stand scanning, and a
Manual Trigger mode for out-of-stand scanning. To do this, you must first scan thepreferred Streaming Presentation mode (Normal or Enhanced), then scan the
Manual Trigger mode (Normal or Enhanced) you want to use.

Hands Free Time-Out
The Scan Stand and Presentation Modes are referred to as “hands free” modes. If
the scanner’s trigger is pulled when using a hands free mode, the scanner changes
to manual trigger mode. You can set the time the scanner should remain in manualtrigger mode by setting the Hands Free Time-Out. Once the time-out value isreached, (if there have been no further trigger pulls) the scanner reverts to theoriginal hands free mode.
Scan the Hands Free Time-Out barcode, then scan the time-out duration (from 0300,000 milliseconds) from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, thenSave. Default = 5,000 ms.

Hands Free Time-Out

Reread Delay
This sets the time period before the scanner can read the same barcode a second
time. Setting a reread delay protects against accidental rereads of the same
barcode. Longer delays are effective in minimizing accidental rereads. Use shorter
delays in applications where repetitive barcode scanning is required. Reread Delay
only works when in a Presentation Mode (see page 91). Default = Medium.

Short (500 ms)* Medium (750 ms)

Long (1000 ms)

Xenon XP User Guide

97

Extra Long (2000 ms)

User-Specified Reread Delay
If you want to set your own length for the reread delay, scan the barcode below,
then set the delay (from 0-30,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save.

User-Specified Reread Delay

2D Reread Delay
Sometimes 2D barcodes can take longer to read than other barcodes. If you wish to
set a separate Reread Delay for 2D barcodes, scan one of the programming codesthat follows. 2D Reread Delay Off indicates that the time set for Reread Delay isused for both 1D and 2D barcodes. Default = 2D Reread Delay Off.

* 2D Reread Delay Off

Short (1000ms)

Medium (2000ms)

Long (3000ms)

Extra Long (4000ms)

98

Xenon XP User Guide

Character Activation
You may use a character sent from the host to trigger the scanner to begin
scanning. When the activation character is received, the scanner continues
scanning until either the Character Activation Timeout (page 4-100) is reached,
the deactivation character is received (see Deactivation Character on page 100), ora barcode is transmitted. Scan the On barcode to use character activation, thenuse Activation Character (page 99) to select the character you will send from thehost to start scanning. Default = Off.

* Off

On

Activation Character
This sets the character used to trigger scanning when using Character Activation
Mode. On the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), page 300, find the hex
value that represents the character you want to use to trigger scanning. Scan thefollowing barcode, then use the Programming Chart to read the alphanumeric
combination that represents that ASCII character. Scan Save to finish. Default = 12
[DC2].

Activation Character

End Character Activation After Good Read
After a barcode is successfully detected and read from the scanner, theillumination can be programmed either to remain on and scanning, or to turn off.
When End Character Activation After Good Read is enabled, the illumination
turns off and stops scanning after a good read. If you scan Do Not End Character
Activation After Good Read, the illumination remains on after a good read.

Do Not End Character
Activation After Good Read

Xenon XP User Guide

99

End Character Activation After
Good Read

Character Activation Timeout
You can set a timeout for the length of time the illumination remains on andattempting to decode barcodes when using Character Activation Mode. Set thelength (in milliseconds) for a timeout by scanning the following barcode, thensetting the timeout (from 1-300,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = 30,000 ms.

Character Activation Timeout

Character Deactivation
If you have sent a character from the host to trigger the scanner to begin scanning,
you can also send a deactivation character to stop scanning. Scan the following On
barcode to use character deactivation, then use Deactivation Character(following) to select the character you will send from the host to terminate
scanning. Default = Off.

* Off

On

Deactivation Character
This sets the character used to terminate scanning when using Character
Deactivation Mode. On the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), page 300,
find the hex value that represents the character you want to use to terminate
scanning. Scan the following barcode, then use the Programming Chart, beginningon page 311 to read the alphanumeric combination that represents that ASCII
character. Scan Save to finish. Default = 14 [DC4].

Deactivation Character

100

Xenon XP User GuideIllumination Lights
If you want the illumination lights on while reading a barcode, scan the Lights On
barcode, below. However, if you want to turn just the lights off, scan the Lights Off
barcode. Default = Lights On.
Note: This setting does not affect the aimer light. The aiming light can be set using Aimer
Mode (page 102).

* Lights On

Lights Off

Aimer Delay
The aimer delay allows a delay time for the operator to aim the scanner before thepicture is taken. Use these codes to set the time between when the trigger is pulled
and when the picture is taken. During the delay time, the aiming light will appear,
but the LEDs won’t turn on until the delay time is over. Default = Off.

1 millisecond

250 milliseconds

500 milliseconds* Off (noXenon XP User Guide

101

User-Specified Aimer Delay
If you want to set your own length for the duration of the delay, scan the barcode
below, then set the time-out by scanning digits (0 - 4,000 ms) from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save.

Delay Duration

Aimer Mode
This feature allows you to turn the aimer on and off. When the Interlaced barcode
is scanned, the aimer is interlaced with the illumination LEDs. Default = Interlaced

Off* Interlaced

Centering
Use Centering to narrow the scanner’s field of view to make sure that when thescanner is hand-held, it reads only those barcodes intended by the user. For
instance, if multiple codes are placed closely together, centering will insure that
only the desired codes are read. (Centering can be used in conjunction with Aimer
Delay, page 101, for the most error-free operation in applications where multiple
codes are spaced closely together. Using the Aimer Delay and Centering features,the scanner can emulate the operation of older systems, such as linear laser
barcode scanners.)
Note: To adjust centering when the scanner is in a stand, see Presentation Centering (page4-92).

102

Xenon XP User Guide

Single Code Centering
Scan Single Code Centering to target the barcode closest to the center of theimage. Singling out a barcode in this manner increases scanning accuracy when
there are multiple barcodes close together.

Single Code Centering

Custom Centering
Use the following settings to customize your centering window. If a barcode is nottouched by a predefined window, it will not be decoded or output by the scanner. If
centering is turned on by scanning Centering On, the scanner only reads codesthat pass through the centering window you specify using the Top of Centering
Window, Bottom of Centering Window, Left, and Right of Centering Windowbarcodes.
Example: In the example below, the white box is the centering window. The centering window
has been set to 20% left, 30% right, 8% top, and 25% bottom. Since Barcode 1
passes through the centering window, it will be read. Barcode 2 does not passthrough the centering window, so it will not be read.
0%

Barcode 1

10

Barcode 2

20

30

40
50

60

70

80

90

100
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100%

Note: A barcode needs only to be touched by the centering window in order to be read. It

Xenon XP User Guide103

does not need to pass completely through the centering window.
Scan Centering On, then scan one of the following barcodes to change the top,bottom, left, or right of the centering window. Then scan the percent you want toshift the centering window using digits from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311, then Save. Default Centering = 40% for Top and Left, 60% for Bottom
and Right.

Centering On* Centering Off

Top of Centering Window

Bottom of Centering Window

Left of Centering Window

Right of Centering Window

Preferred Symbology
The scanner can be programmed to specify one symbology as a higher priority overother symbologies in situations where both barcode symbologies appear on thesame label, but the lower priority symbology cannot be disabled.
For example, you may be using the scanner in a retail setting to read U.P.C.
symbols, but have occasional need to read a code on a drivers license. Since somelicenses have a Code 39 symbol as well as the PDF417 symbol, you can use
Preferred Symbology to specify that the PDF417 symbol be read instead of theCode 39.
Preferred Symbology classifies each symbology as high priority, low priority, or as
an unspecified type. When a low priority symbology is presented, the scanner
ignores it for a set period of time (see Preferred Symbology Time-out on page 106)
while it searches for the high priority symbology. If a high priority symbology islocated during this period, then that data is read immediately.

104

Xenon XP User GuideIf the time-out period expires before a high priority symbology is read, the scanner
will read any barcode in its view (low priority or unspecified). If there is no barcodein the scanner’s view after the time-out period expires, then no data is reported.
Note: A low priority symbol must be centered on the aiming pattern to be read.
Scan a barcode below to enable or disable Preferred Symbology. Default = Preferred
Symbology Off.

Preferred Symbology On* Preferred Symbology Off

High Priority Symbology
To specify the high priority symbology, scan the High Priority Symbology barcode
below. On the Symbology Charts on page 297, find the symbology you want to set
as high priority. Locate the Hex value for that symbology and scan the 2 digit hex
value from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default =None.

High Priority Symbology

Low Priority Symbology
To specify the low priority symbology, scan the Low Priority Symbology barcode
below. On the Symbology Charts on page 297, find the symbology you want to set
as low priority. Locate the Hex value for that symbology and scan the 2 digit hex
value from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311.
If you want to set additional low priority symbologies, scan FF, then scan the 2 digithex value from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311, for the next
symbology. You can program up to 5 low priority symbologies. Scan Save to saveyour selection. Default = None.

Low Priority Symbology

Xenon XP User Guide

105

Preferred Symbology Time-out
Once you have enabled Preferred Symbology and entered the high and low priority
symbologies, you must set the time-out period. This is the period of time thescanner will search for a high priority barcode after a low priority barcode has beenencountered. Scan the barcode below, then set the delay (from 1-3,000
milliseconds) by scanning digits from the Programming Chart, beginning on page311, then Save. Default = 500 ms.

Preferred Symbology Time-out

Preferred Symbology Default
Scan the barcode below to set all Preferred Symbology entries to their default
values.

Preferred Symbology Default

Output Sequence Overview
Output Sequence Editor
This programming selection allows you to program the scanner to output data(when scanning more than one symbol) in whatever order your application
requires, regardless of the order in which the barcodes are scanned. You can define
up to 15 barcodes in an output sequence.
Note: To make Output Sequence Editor selections, you’ll need to know the code I.D., code
length, and character match(es) your application requires. Use the alphanumericsymbols from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. You must hold thetrigger while reading each barcode in the sequence.

To Add an Output Sequence
An output sequence is created using a string of serial commands that is sent to thescanner. This string is most easily sent to the scanner using the EZConfig softwaretool (see EZConfig for Scanning Introduction on page 239). You can also
accomplish this by scanning alphanumeric barcodes (see the Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311).

106

Xenon XP User Guide

1. If you are using barcodes to create your output sequence, scan Enter Output
Sequence on page 110.
2. Code I.D.
On the Symbology Charts on page 297, find the symbology to which you want
to apply the output sequence format. Make a note of the hex value for thatsymbology. If you are using barcodes to create your output sequence, scan the
2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311.
3. Length
Specify what length (up to 9999 characters) of data output will be acceptable
for this symbology. Make a note of the length. If you are using barcodes tocreate your output sequence, scan the 4 digit data length Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311. (Note: 50 characters is entered as 0050. 9999 is auniversal number, indicating all lengths.) When calculating the length, youmust count any programmed prefixes, suffixes, or formatted characters as partof the length (unless using 9999).
4. Character Match Sequences
On the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), page 300, find the hex valuethat represents the character(s) you want to match. Make a note of the hex
value for the character(s). If you are using barcodes to create your output
sequence, use the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311 to read thealphanumeric combination that represents the ASCII characters. (99 is theuniversal number, indicating all characters.)
5. End Output Sequence Editor
Use FF to terminate this string or to begin another output sequence. If you areusing barcodes, scan F F. Scan Save to save your entries.

Other Programming Selections
If you are creating an output sequence using barcodes, scan Discard (page 312) toexit without saving any output sequence changes.

Output Sequence Editor Commands
SEQBLKSequence editor start command.
SEQPREAdd prefix to complete output sequences.
SEQSUF

Add suffix to complete output sequences.

SEQSEP

Add separators to complete output sequences.

SEQTTS1

Transmit partial sequence.

SEQSAT

Define satisfactory subsets of full output sequence.

SEQTIM

Timeout for sequence members when using SEQSAT.

SEQIPRAdd prefix to partial output sequences.

Xenon XP User Guide

107

SEQISUAdd suffix to partial output sequences.
SEQISEAdd separators to partial output sequences.
TRGSTOTimeout for partial output sequences.
FFTermination string.
Examples outlining how to use these commands are shown below.

Output Sequence Example 1 - Three Symbologies

In this example, you are scanning PDF417, Code 128, and Code 39 barcodes, but
you want the scanner to output Code 39 first, Code 128 second, and PDF417 third.
Set up the sequence editor with the following command line:
SEQBLK

sequence editor start command

62

code identifier for Code 39

9999

code length that must match for Code 39, 9999 = alllengths

43

start character match for Code 39, 43h = "C"FF

termination string for first code

6A

code identifier for Code 128

9999

code length that must match for Code 128, 9999 = alllengths54

start character match for Code 128, 54h = “T”

FFtermination string for first code

72

code identifier for PDF417

9999

code length that must match for PDF417, 9999 = alllengths

4D

start character match for PDF417, 4Dh = “M”

FFtermination string for third code

The whole command line would look like this:SEQBLK62999943FF6A999954FF7299994DFF

108

Xenon XP User Guide

The data is output as:
CODE39SMPLTSTMSGCODE128MSGPDF417
See the next example to further refine this output.

Output Sequence Example 2 - Three Symbologies with <> Separators
In this example, you are scanning the same three barcodes, but you want <>brackets and a carriage return and line feed to separate your output.

The sequence editor would use the same command line as shown in Output
Sequence Example 1 - Three Symbologies (page 108):
SEQBLK

sequence editor start command

62

code identifier for Code 39

9999

code length that must match for Code 39, 9999 = alllengths

43

start character match for Code 39, 43h = "C"FF

termination string for first code

6A

code identifier for Code 128

9999

code length that must match for Code 128, 9999 = alllengths54

start character match for Code 128, 54h = “T”

FFtermination string for first code

72

code identifier for PDF417

9999

code length that must match for PDF417, 9999 = alllengths

4D

start character match for PDF417, 4Dh = “M”

FFtermination string for third code

But you would add your <> separators for each sequence:

Xenon XP User Guide

SEQSEP99

separator for each sequence, 99 = all symbologies

3C

left bracket (<)

109

3E

right bracket (>)

And add the carriage return and line feed as a suffix:
SEQSUF99

separator for suffixes, 99 = all symbologies

0D

carriage return

0A

line feed

The whole command line would look like this:SEQBLK62999943FF6A999954FF7299994DFFSEQSEP993C3ESEQSUF990D0
A
The data is output as:<CODE39SMPL><TSTMSGCODE128><MSGPDF417>

Enter Output Sequence
If you are using barcodes to create your output sequence, scan Enter Output
Sequence to begin scanning your string.

Enter Output Sequence

Partial Sequence
If an output sequence operation is terminated before all your output sequence
criteria are met, the barcode data acquired to that point is a “partial sequence.” You
can define how partial sequences are output using the same types of command
strings you used to create output sequences.

Partial Sequence Example - Three Symbologies with <> Separators, but with aDamaged CodeIn this example, you are scanning PDF417, Code 128, and Code 39 barcodes, andyou want the scanner to output Code 39 first, Code 128 second, and PDF417 third,in brackets, as shown below, but the Code 39 barcode has been damaged andcannot be output.

110

Xenon XP User Guide

You would use the same command line as shown in Output Sequence Example 2 Three Symbologies with <> Separators (page 109):
SEQBLK

sequence editor start command

62

code identifier for Code 39

9999

code length that must match for Code 39, 9999 = alllengths

43

start character match for Code 39, 43h = "C"FF

termination string for first code

6A

code identifier for Code 128

9999

code length that must match for Code 128, 9999 = alllengths54

start character match for Code 128, 54h = “T”

FFtermination string for first code

72

code identifier for PDF417

9999

code length that must match for PDF417, 9999 = alllengths

4D

start character match for PDF417, 4Dh = “M”

FFtermination string for third code

SEQSEP99

separator for each sequence, 99 = all symbologies

3C

left bracket (<)

3Eright bracket (>)

SEQSUF99

separator for suffixes, 99 = all symbologies

0D

carriage return

0A

line feed

And you would add >PARTIAL< as the prefix to note the partial sequence:

Xenon XP User Guide

SEQTTS1transmit partial sequence

SEQISU99

add partial sequence prefix, 99 = all symbologies

111

3E

right bracket (>)

50

P

41

A

52

R

54

T

49

I

41

A

4C

L

3C

left bracket (<)

The whole command line would look like this:SEQBLK62999943FF6A999954FF7299994DFFSEQSEP993C3ESEQSUF990D0
ASEQTTS1SEQISU993E5041525449414C3C
The data is output as:>PARTIAL<<TSTMSGCODE128><MSGPDF417>

Discard Partial Output Sequence
If you want to discard partial sequences when the output sequence operation is
terminated before completion, scan Discard Partial Sequence.

* Discard Partial Sequence

Output Sequence Timeouts
You can set a timeout for every code in the output sequence defined by the
SEQBLK command. The scanner applies the shortest timeout corresponding to
any of the codes that have been read during the current trigger session. When thetimeout expires, the scanner sends all codes that it has been read in the order they
appear in the sequence defined by SEQBLK.
To specify the timeout, use the SEQTIM command followed by a list of timeouts inmilliseconds. Each timeout is specified as a 4-decimal digit terminated by FF. The
timeout value 9999 is special and indicates that the timeout for that code is“infinite”.

112

Xenon XP User Guide

The number of timeouts specified should correspond to the number of codes in thesequence defined by SEQBLK. You can specify one additional timeout, which will
apply to codes not matching any member of the sequence. This can be useful if
Require Output Sequence is On/Not Required. If you do not specify an additionaltimeout for codes not in the defined sequence, the last timeout specified by
SEQTIM will apply.

Output Sequence Timeout Example
For example, if SEQBLK defines a 4-code sequence, you can specify timeouts of 5,6, 7, and 8 seconds for codes 1-4 respectively using the command
SEQTIM5000FF6000FF7000FF8000FF. Codes that are not part of the definedsequence would have an implied timeout of 8 seconds in this case (the final
timeout in the list). To explicitly specify a timeout for such codes, you can include
one more timeout at the end of the list. For example, to include a timeout of 1
second for non-sequence codes, use the command
SEQTIM5000FF6000FF7000FF8000FF1000FF.

Satisfactory Subset of Full Sequence
You can define one or more subsets of barcodes from the complete sequencespecified by SEQBLK. When you scan all the codes from one of these subsets, thescanner will transmit all the codes it has read in the sequence. The scanner sends
the codes in the order defined by SEQBLK.
Note: To use the satisfactory subset feature, you must supply a timeout for each code in thesequence using SEQTIM.

Satisfactory Subset of Full Sequence Timeout Example
To specify a subset, list its members using the SEQSAT command and terminate
each subset with FF. The members of each subset are specified as single hex digits
corresponding to their index within the full sequence, 1 being the first. For
example, to specify two subsets, the first consisting of the first and second code in
the sequence and the second subset consisting of the second and third code, use
the command SEQSAT12FF23FF.
To define a subset with an odd number of codes, insert a 0 before the final codeindex. For example, to define a 3-code subset consisting of the first, second, andthird codes, use the command SEQSAT1203FF.

Default Output Sequence
Default Sequence programs the scanner to all universal values. Be certain you
want to delete or clear all formats before you read the Default Sequence symbol.

Default Sequence

Xenon XP User Guide

113

Require Output Sequence
When an output sequence is Required, all output data must conform to an editedsequence or the scanner will not transmit the output data to the host device. Whenit’s On/Not Required, the scanner will attempt to get the output data to conform toan edited sequence but, if it cannot, the scanner transmits all output data to thehost device as is, or formatted according to the partial sequence output format(see Partial Sequence on page 110).
When the output sequence is Off, the barcode data is output to the host as thescanner decodes it. Default = Off.
Note: This selection is unavailable when the Multiple Symbols Selection is turned on.

Required

On/Not Required*Off

Good Read Tone - Output Sequences
The scanner may be programmed to either beep or click in response to a good readof each barcode in an output sequence, or to emit a beep or error tone for a partial
sequence. Default = Good Read Click - Each Code in Sequence and Error Tone Partial Sequence Output.
,

Good Read Beep - Each
Code in Sequence* Good Read Click - Each
Code in SequenceGood Read Beep - Partial
Sequence Output

114

Xenon XP User Guide

* Error Tone - Partial
Sequence Output

Multiple Symbols
When this programming selection is turned On, it allows you to read multiple
symbols with a single pull of the scanner’s trigger. If you press and hold the trigger,
aiming the scanner at a series of symbols, it reads unique symbols once, beeping
and or vibrating (if turned on) for each read. The scanner attempts to find anddecode new symbols as long as the trigger is pulled. The maximum number ofbarcodes read is 21. When this programming selection is turned Off, the scanner
will only read the symbol closest to the aiming beam. Default = Off.

On

* Off

No ReadWith No Read turned On, the scanner notifies you if a code cannot be read. If using
an EZConfig-Scanning Tool Scan Data Window (see page 239), an “NR” appears
when a code cannot be read. If No Read is turned Off, the “NR” will not appear.
Default = Off.

On

* Off

If you want a different notation than “NR,” for example, “Error,” or “Bad Code,” youcan edit the output message (see Data Format beginning on page 133). The hex
code for the No Read symbol is 9C.

Xenon XP User Guide

115

Video Reverse
Video Reverse is used to allow the scanner to read barcodes that are inverted. The
Video Reverse Off barcode below is an example of this type of barcode. Scan
Video Reverse Only to read only inverted barcodes. Scan Video Reverse andStandard Barcodes to read both types of codes.
Note: After scanning Video Reverse Only, menu barcodes cannot be read. You must scanVideo Reverse Off or Video Reverse and Standard Barcodes in order to read menu
barcodes.
Note: Images downloaded from the unit are not reversed. This is a setting for decoding only.

Video Reverse Only

Video Reverse and Standard
Barcodes* Video Reverse Off

116

Xenon XP User Guide

Working Orientation
Some barcodes are direction-sensitive. For example, KIX codes and OCR canmisread when scanned sideways or upside down. Use the working orientation
settings if your direction-sensitive codes will not usually be presented upright tothe scanner. Default = Upright.
Upright:

Vertical, Top to Bottom:(Rotate CW 90°)
Upside Down:

Vertical, Bottom to Top:
(Rotate CCW 90°)

* Upright

Vertical, Bottom to Top

Upside Down

Vertical, Top to Bottom

Xenon XP User Guide

117

118

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

5HEALTHCARE SETTINGS

The following settings have been developed to enhance scanning in a healthcare
environment. These settings are only supported by the Xenon XP 1950h scannerand the Xenon XP 1952h and Xenon XP 1952h-BF scanner and base. They allow
you to set quickly configure streaming presentation, and to set the scanner andbase to quiet modes for scanning that do not disturb resting patients.

Quiet Operations - Combination Codes
The following combination codes program your Xenon XP healthcare scanner andbase for silent or quiet settings using a single programming code. If you wish toprogram some of these quiet settings individually, refer to Quiet Operations - LED
and Volume Settings, beginning on page 121.

Silent Mode with Flashing LED
Scan the following barcode to completely silence the scanner and base. The
scanner beep, base beep, base and scanner power up beep, and scanner linking
sounds are all silenced. When a barcode is scanned, the LED and aimer flash
5 times. Green indicates a good scan, red indicates a bad scan.

Silent Mode with Flashing LED Cordless Scanner and Base

Silent Mode with Flashing LED Corded Scanner

Xenon XP User Guide

119

Silent Mode with Long LED
Scan the following barcode to completely silence the scanner and base. The
scanner beep, base beep, base and scanner power up beep, and scanner linking
sounds are all silenced. When a barcode is scanned, the LED and aimer remain
solidly lit for 1 second. Green indicates a good scan, red indicates a bad scan.

Silent Mode with Long LED Cordless Scanner and Base

Silent Mode with Long LED Corded Scanner

Very Low Beeper (Nighttime Mode)
The following barcode silences the base, and sets the scanner for a very low beep
when reading barcodes. After scanning this code, the base beep, base and scanner
power up beep, and scanner linking sounds are all silenced. When a barcode isscanned, the scanner emits a very soft beep.

Nighttime Mode Cordless Scanner and BaseNighttime Mode Corded Scanner

120

Xenon XP User Guide

Low Beeper (Daytime Mode)
The following barcode sets all sounds to on, but at a low volume. The scanner beep,base beep, base and scanner power up beep, and scanner linking sounds are all set
to low volume.

Daytime Mode Cordless Scanner and Base

Daytime Mode Corded Scanner

To reset your scanner and base to default sounds, refer to Reset the Custom
Defaults (page 245).

Quiet Operations - LED and Volume Settings
If you have silenced or muted the scanner and base sounds, you may wish to adjust
the visual (LED) indicators for Bluetooth linking sounds, scanning sounds, paging
sounds, and out of range alarm sounds.

Linking LED Colors and Sound
Note: This setting is not supported by the Xenon XP 1950h scanner.
Under normal operations, the scanner chirps when linking to a base or an accesspoint, and the LED on both the base and scanner flash green. If you want to silence
all sounds and set both devices to flash red LEDs to indicate the linking status,
scan the Red LED Flashes/Silent barcode below. The LEDS flash red while linking,then green to indicate the base and scanner are linked. To return to the default LED
colors and sound, scan Green LED Flashes/Sound. Default = Green LED Flashes/
Sound.

* Green LED Flashes/Sound

Red LED Flashes/Silent

Xenon XP User Guide

121

Number of LED Flashes
If you have silenced the scanner’s beeper, you may set the number of times the
LED flashes when reading barcodes. Default = 1 LED Flash.
Note: If you have set LED Solid (No Flash) (page 123), to anything but Off, that setting will
override the LED Flash settings. In that case, scan the LED Solid Off barcode to turnoff this feature, then scan the LED Flash code you wish to use.

* 1 LED Flash5 LED Flashes

10 LED Flashes

25 LED Flashes

LED Flash Rate
If you have silenced the scanner’s beeper, you may set the how quickly the LED
flashes when reading barcodes. Default = Fast Flash.

* Fast Flash

Medium Flash

Slow Flash122

Xenon XP User Guide

LED Solid (No Flash)
Under normal operations, the scanner’s LED flashes once for a good read. You may
set the LED to remain on for a length of time after a good read instead of flashing.
Default = LED Solid Off (Resume Flash).

* LED Solid Off(Resume Flash)

LED Solid 1 Second

LED Solid 3 Seconds

LED Solid 5 Seconds

If you have scanned a barcode and don’t want to wait for the LED to turn off, press
the trigger a second time and the LED turns off. You can then scan the next
barcode.

Page Volume Control
Note: This setting is not supported by the Xenon XP 1950h scanner.
When you press the page button on the base or Access Point, the scanners
associated with that base or Access Point will begin beeping in response. If youpress the trigger on a scanner that is beeping in response, or press the page buttonon the base or Access Point a second time, all associated scanners will stop
beeping. The following settings set the paging volume, independent of the volume
used when scanning barcodes. Default = Low.

Page Volume Off* Page Volume Low

Xenon XP User Guide

123

Page Volume Medium

Page Volume HighOut-of-Range Alarm Volume
Note: This setting is not supported by the Xenon XP 1950h scanner.
If your scanner is out range of the base, an alarm sounds from both your base andscanner. If your scanner is out range of an Access Point, an alarm sounds from justthe scanner. The alarm stops when the scanner is moved closer to the base or
Access Point, when the base or Access Point connects to another scanner, or when
the alarm duration expires (see Out-of-Range Delay on page 125). The following
settings set the Out-of-Range Alarm for the base and the scanner, independent of
the volume used when scanning barcodes. Default = Base Alarm Volume Low,
Scanner Alarm Volume Low.

Base Alarm Volume
Off

Scanner Alarm Volume
Off* Base Alarm Volume
Low* Scanner Alarm Volume
Low

Base Alarm Volume
Medium124

Xenon XP User Guide

Scanner Alarm Volume
MediumBase Alarm Volume
High

Scanner Alarm Volume
High

Out-of-Range Delay
Note: This setting is not supported by the Xenon XP 1950h scanner.
When using the Out-of-Range Alarm settings, the length of the delay for the alarmis set with an Out-of-Range Delay. When the scanner is out of range of the base or
Access Point, the alarm will delay for a set length of time before going off. Set thelength (in seconds) for a timeout by scanning the following barcode, then setting
the timeout (from 0-3,000 seconds) by scanning digits from the Programming
Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save. Default = No Delay.

Out-of-Range Delay

Xenon XP User Guide

125

126

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

6DATA EDIT

Prefix/Suffix Overview
When a barcode is scanned, additional information is sent to the host computer
along with the barcode data. This group of barcode data and additional,
user-defined data is called a “message string.” The selections in this section areused to build the user-defined data into the message string.
Prefix and Suffix characters are data characters that can be sent before and afterscanned data. You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or onlywith specific symbologies. The following illustration shows the breakdown of amessage string:

PrefixScanned Data

Suffix1-11 alphanumeric &controlcharactersvariablelength1-11 alphanumeric &controlcharacters

Points to Keep In Mind•

It is not necessary to build a message string. The selections in this chapter are
only used if you wish to alter the default settings. Default prefix = None. Default
suffix = None.

•

A prefix or suffix may be added or cleared from one symbology or all
symbologies.

•

You can add any prefix or suffix from the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page
1252), beginning on page 300, plus Code I.D. and AIM I.D.

•

You can string together several entries for several symbologies at one time.

Xenon XP User Guide

127

•

Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the
output.

•When setting up for specific symbologies (as opposed to all symbologies), thespecific symbology ID value counts as an added prefix or suffix character.

•

The maximum size of a prefix or suffix configuration is 200 characters, which
includes header information.

Add a Prefix or Suffix:
Step 1.

Scan the Add Prefix or Add Suffix symbol (page 129).

Step 2.

Determine the 2 digit hex value from the Symbology Charts (beginningon page 297) for the symbology to which you want to apply the prefix or
suffix. For example, for Code 128, Code ID is “j” and Hex ID is “6A”.

Step 3.

Scan the 2 hex digits from the Programming Chart, beginning on page311, or scan 9, 9 for all symbologies.

To add the Code I.D., scan 5, C, 8, 0.
To add the AIM I.D., scan 5, C, 8, 1.
To add the serial number, scan 5, C, 8, 8.
To add a backslash (\), scan 5, C, 5, C.
Note: When adding a backslash (\), you must scan 5C twice – once to create the leading
backslash and then to create the backslash itself.
Step 4.

Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for every prefix or suffix character.

Step 5.

Scan Save to exit and save, or scan Discard to exit without saving.

Repeat the steps above to add a prefix or suffix for another symbology.

Example: Add a Tab Suffix to All Symbologies
Step 1.

Scan Add Suffix.

Step 2.

Scan 9, 9 from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311 to apply
this suffix to all symbologies.

Step 3.

Scan 0, 9 from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. This
corresponds with the hex value for a horizontal tab, shown in the ASCII
Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300.

Step 4.

Scan Save, or scan Discard to exit without saving.

Clear One or All Prefixes or Suffixes
You can clear a single prefix or suffix, or clear all prefixes/suffixes for a symbology.
If you have been entering prefixes and suffixes for single symbologies, you can use
Clear One Prefix (Suffix) to delete a specific character from a symbology. When
you Clear All Prefixes (Suffixes), all the prefixes or suffixes for a symbology aredeleted.

128

Xenon XP User GuideStep 1.

Scan the Clear One Prefix or Clear One Suffix symbol.

Step 2.

Determine the 2 digit hex value from the Symbology Chart (included in
the Symbology Charts, beginning on page 297) for the symbology fromwhich you want to clear the prefix or suffix.

Step 3.

Scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311 or scan 9, 9 for all symbologies.

Your change is automatically saved.

Add a Carriage Return Suffix to All Symbologies
Scan the following barcode if you wish to add a carriage return suffix to all
symbologies at once. This action first clears all current suffixes, then programs acarriage return suffix for all symbologies.

Add CR Suffix
All Symbologies

Prefix Selections
Add Prefix

Clear One Prefix

Clear All Prefixes

Suffix Selections
Add Suffix

Clear One Suffix

Xenon XP User Guide

129

Clear All Suffixes

Function Code Transmit
By default, all ASCII control characters are transmitted with barcode data. These
non-printable characters are translated into predefined key strokes, or CTRL+X
functions (see ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300).
If these key strokes interfere with your host’s software application, scan Disable tokeep these ASCII control characters from being transmitted. Default = Enable.

* Enable

DisableNote: You can also use a custom data format (see Data Format beginning on page 133) totranslate these characters into a more meaningful output.

Intercharacter, Interfunction, and Intermessage Delays
Some terminals drop information (characters) if data comes through too quickly.
Intercharacter, interfunction, and intermessage delays slow the transmission ofdata, increasing data integrity.

Intercharacter Delay
An intercharacter delay of up to 5000 milliseconds (in 5ms increments) may beplaced between the transmission of each character of scanned data. Scan theIntercharacter Delay barcode below, then scan the number of 5ms delays from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save.
PrefixScanned Data
1

2

3

4

Suffix5

Intercharacter Delay

Intercharacter Delay

130

Xenon XP User GuideTo remove this delay, scan the Intercharacter Delay barcode, then set the numberof delays to 0. Scan the Save barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311.
Note: Intercharacter delays are not supported in USB serial emulation.

User Specified Intercharacter Delay
An intercharacter delay of up to 5000 milliseconds (in 5ms increments) may beplaced after the transmission of a particular character of scanned data. Scan the
Delay Length barcode below, then scan the number of 5ms delays from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311, then Save.
Next, scan the Character to Trigger Delay barcode, then the 2-digit hex value for a
printable character to trigger the delay (see Lower ASCII Reference Table, page
301.)

Delay Length

Character to Trigger Delay

To remove this delay, scan the Delay Length barcode, and set the number ofdelays to 0. Scan the Save barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311.

Interfunction Delay
An interfunction delay of up to 5000 milliseconds (in 5ms increments) may beplaced between the transmission of each control character in the message string.
Scan the Interfunction Delay barcode below, then scan the number of 5ms delays,
and the Save barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311.
PrefixSTX

1Scanned Data
HT

2 3 4 5

SuffixCR

LF

Interfunction Delays

Interfunction Delay

Xenon XP User Guide131

To remove this delay, scan the Interfunction Delay barcode, then set the numberof delays to 0. Scan the Save barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311.

Intermessage Delay
An intermessage delay of up to 5000 milliseconds (in 5ms increments) may beplaced between each scan transmission. Scan the Intermessage Delay barcode
below, then scan the number of 5ms delays, and the Save barcode from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311.

1st Scan Transmission
2nd Scan Transmission
Intermessage Delay

Intermessage Delay

To remove this delay, scan the Intermessage Delay barcode, then set the numberof delays to 0. Scan the Save barcode from the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311.

132

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

7DATA FORMAT

Data Format Editor Introduction
You may use the Data Format Editor to change the scanner’s output. For example,
you can use the Data Format Editor to insert characters at certain points inbarcode data as it is scanned. The selections in the following pages are used only if
you wish to alter the output. Default Data Format setting = None.
Normally, when you scan a barcode, it is output automatically. However, when you
create a format, you must use a “send” command (see Send Commands on page136) within the format program to output data.
Multiple formats may be programmed into the scanner. They are stacked in theorder in which they are entered. However, the following list presents the order inwhich formats are applied:
1. Specific Terminal ID, Actual Code ID, Actual Length
2. Specific Terminal ID, Actual Code ID, Universal Length
3. Specific Terminal ID, Universal Code ID, Actual Length
4. Specific Terminal ID, Universal Code ID, Universal Length
5. Universal Terminal ID, Actual Code ID, Actual Length
6. Universal Terminal ID, Actual Code ID, Universal Length
7. Universal Terminal ID, Universal Code ID, Actual Length
8. Universal Terminal ID, Universal Code ID, Universal Length
The maximum size of a data format configuration is 2000 bytes, which includes
header information.
If a barcode is read that fails the first data format, the next data format, if there isone, will be used on the barcode data. If there is no other data format, the raw data
is output.

Xenon XP User Guide133

If you have changed data format settings, and wish to clear all formats and returnto the factory defaults, scan the Default Data Format code below.

* Default Data Format

Show Data Format
Scan the barcode below to show current data format settings.

Data Format Settings

Add a Data Format
Step 1.

Scan the Enter Data Format symbol (page 135).

Step 2.

Select Primary/Alternate Format
Determine if this will be your primary data format, or one of 3 alternate
formats. This allows you to save a total of 4 different data formats. To
program your primary format, scan 0 from the Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311. If you are programming an alternate format,
scan 1, 2, or 3, depending on which alternate format you areprogramming. (See Primary/Alternate Data Formats on page 151 forfurther information.)

Step 3.

Terminal Type
Refer to Terminal ID Table (page 136) and locate the Terminal ID number
for your PC. Scan three numeric barcodes from the Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311, to program the scanner for your terminal ID (youmust enter 3 digits). For example, scan 0 0 3 for an AT wedge.

Note: 099 indicates all terminal types.
Step 4.

Code I.D.
In the Symbology Charts, beginning on page 297, find the symbology towhich you want to apply the data format. Locate the Hex value for thatsymbology and scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311.
If you wish to create a data format for all symbologies, with the exceptionof some specific symbologies, refer to B8 (page 149).
If you are creating a data format for Batch Mode Quantity, use 35 for the
Code I.D.

Note: 99 indicates all symbologies.
Step 5.

134

LengthSpecify what length (up to 9999 characters) of data will be acceptable forthis symbology. Scan the four digit data length from the Programming

Xenon XP User Guide

Chart, beginning on page 311. For example, 50 characters is entered as0050.
Note: 9999 indicates all lengths.
Step 6.

Editor Commands
Refer to Data Format Editor Commands (page 136). Scan the symbols
that represent the command you want to enter.

Step 7.

Scan Save to save your data format, or Discard to exit without saving yourchanges.

Enter Data Format

Save

Discard

Other Programming Selections•

Clear One Data Format
This deletes one data format for one symbology. If you are clearing the primary
format, scan 0 from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. If you areclearing an alternate format, scan 1, 2, or 3, depending on the format you areclearing. Scan the Terminal Type and Code I.D. (see Symbology Charts on page297), and the barcode data length for the specific data format that you want todelete. All other formats remain unaffected.

•

Clear all Data Formats
This clears all data formats.

•

Save
Exit and save your data format changes.

•

Discard
Exit without saving any data format changes.

Clear One Data Format

Clear All Data Formats

Xenon XP User Guide

135

Save

Discard

Terminal ID Table
Terminal
USB

SerialKeyboard

Model(s)Terminal ID

PC keyboard (HID)124

Mac Keyboard

125

PC Keyboard (Japanese)

134

Serial (COM driver required)

130

HID POS131

USB SurePOS Handheld

128

USB SurePOS Tabletop

129

RS232 TTL

000

RS232 True

000

RS485 (IBM-HHBCR 1+2, 46xx)

051

PS2 compatibles

003

AT compatibles

002

Data Format Editor Commands
When working with the Data Format Editor, a virtual cursor is moved along yourinput data string. The following commands are used to both move this cursor todifferent positions, and to select, replace, and insert data into the final output.

Send Commands
Send all characters
F1 Include in the output message all of the characters from the input message, startingfrom current cursor position, followed by an insert character. Syntax = F1xx where xx
stands for the insert character’s hex value for its ASCII code. Refer to the ASCII
Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for decimal, hex andcharacter codes.

136

Xenon XP User GuideSend a number of characters
F2 Include in the output message a number of characters followed by an insert
character. Start from the current cursor position and continue for “nn” characters or
through the last character in the input message, followed by character “xx.” Syntax= F2nnxx where nn stands for the numeric value (00-99) for the number ofcharacters, and xx stands for the insert character’s hex value for its ASCII code.
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.

F2 Example: Send a number of characters

Send the first 10 characters from the barcode above, followed by a carriage return.
Command string: F2100D
F2 is the “Send a number of characters” command
10 is the number of characters to send
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as: 1234567890
F2 and F1 Example: Split characters into 2 lines
Send the first 10 characters from the barcode above, followed by a carriage return,followed by the rest of the characters.
Command string: F2100DF10D
F2 is the “Send a number of characters” command
10 is the number of characters to send for the first line
0D is the hex value for a CR
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
1234567890
ABCDEFGHIJ<CR>

Xenon XP User Guide

137

Send all characters up to a particular character
F3 Include in the output message all characters from the input message, starting withthe character at the current cursor position and continuing to, but not including, thesearch character “ss,” followed by an insert character. The cursor is moved forward
to the “ss” character. Syntax = F3ssxx where ss stands for the search character’s hex
value for its ASCII code, and xx stands for the insert character’s hex value for its
ASCII code.
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.
F3 Example: Send all characters up to a particular character

Using the barcode above, send all characters up to but not including “D,” followed
by a carriage return.
Command string: F3440D
F3 is the “Send all characters up to a particular character” command
44 is the hex value for a 'D”
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
1234567890ABC<CR>

Send all characters up to a string
B9 Include in the output message all characters from the input message, starting withthe character at the current cursor position and continuing to, but not including, thesearch string “s...s.” The cursor is moved forward to the beginning of the “s...s” string.
Syntax = B9nnnns...s where nnnn stands for the length of the string, and s...s stands
for the string to be matched. The string is made up of hex values for the charactersin the string. Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on
page 300 for decimal, hex and character codes.
B9 Example: Send all characters up to a defined string

Using the barcode above, send all characters up to but not including “AB.”Command string: B900024142
B9 is the “Send all characters up to a string” command
0002 is the length of the string (2 characters)
41 is the hex value for A

138

Xenon XP User Guide

42 is the hex value for B
The data is output as: 1234567890

Send all but the last characters
E9 Include in the output message all but the last “nn” characters, starting from thecurrent cursor position. The cursor is moved forward to one position past the last
input message character included. Syntax = E9nn where nn stands for the numericvalue (00-99) for the number of characters that will not be sent at the end of themessage.

Insert a character multiple times
F4 Send “xx” character “nn” times in the output message, leaving the cursor in thecurrent position. Syntax = F4xxnn where xx stands for the insert character’s hex
value for its ASCII code, and nn is the numeric value (00-99) for the number of times
it should be sent. Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginningon page 300 for decimal, hex and character codes.
E9 and F4 Example: Send all but the last characters, followed by 2 tabs

Send all characters except for the last 8 from the barcode above, followed by 2tabs.
Command string: E908F40902
E9 is the “Send all but the last characters” command
08 is the number of characters at the end to ignore
F4 is the “Insert a character multiple times” command
09 is the hex value for a horizontal tab
02 is the number of times the tab character is sent
The data is output as: 1234567890AB <tab><tab>Insert a string
BA Send “ss” string of “nn” length in the output message, leaving the cursor in thecurrent position. Syntax = BAnnnns...s where nnnn stands for the length of thestring, and s...s stands for the string. The string is made up of hex values for thecharacters in the string. Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252),
beginning on page 300 for decimal, hex and character codes.

Xenon XP User Guide139

B9 and BA Example: Look for the string “AB” and insert 2 asterisks (**)

Using the barcode above, send all characters up to but not including “AB.” Insert 2
asterisks at that point, and send the rest of the data with a carriage return after.
Command string: B900024142BA00022A2AF10D
B9 is the “Send all characters up to a string” command
0002 is the length of the string (2 characters)
41 is the hex value for A
42 is the hex value for B
BA is the “Insert a string” command
0002 is the length of the string to be added (2 characters)
2A is the hex value for an asterisk (*)
2A is the hex value for an asterisk (*)
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
1234567890**ABCDEFGHIJ<CR>

Insert symbology name
B3 Insert the name of the barcode’s symbology in the output message, without moving
the cursor. Only symbologies with a Honeywell ID are included (see Symbology
Charts on page 297). Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252),
beginning on page 300 for decimal, hex and character codes.

Insert barcode length
B4 Insert the barcode’s length in the output message, without moving the cursor. The
length is expressed as a numeric string and does not include leading zeros.
B3 and B4 Example: Insert the symbology name and length

Send the symbology name and length before the barcode data from the barcode
above. Break up these insertions with spaces. End with a carriage return.
Command string: B3F42001B4F42001F10D

140

Xenon XP User GuideB3 is the “Insert symbology name” commandF4 is the “Insert a character multiple times” command
20 is the hex value for a space
01 is the number of times the space character is sent
B4 is the “Insert barcode length” commandF4 is the “Insert a character multiple times” command
20 is the hex value for a space
01 is the number of times the space character is sent
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
Code128 20 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJ<CR>

Insert key strokes
B5 Insert a key stroke or combination of key strokes. Key strokes are dependent on yourkeyboard (see Keyboard Key References on page 307). Any key can be inserted,
including arrows and functions. Syntax = 5CB5xxssnn where xx is the number ofkeys pressed (without key modifiers), ss is the key modifier from the table below, andnn is the key number from the Keyboard Key References, page 307.
Key Modifiers

Hex

No Key Modifier

00

Shift Left

01

Shift Right

02

Alt Left

04

Alt Right

08

Control Left

10

Control Right

20

For example, B501021F inserts an “A” on a 104 key, U.S. style keyboard. B5 = thecommand, 01 = number of key press events (without the key modifier), 02 is the key
modifier for Shift Right, and 1F is the “a” key. If a lower case “a” were to be inserted,
B501001F would be entered.

Xenon XP User Guide141

If there are three keystrokes, the syntax would change from B5xxssnn for one
keystroke to B5xxssnnssnnssnn. An example that would insert "abc" is as follows:
B503001F00320030F833.
Note: Key modifiers can be added together when needed. The sum is converted tohexadecimals.
Example: Control Left+Shift Left = 17, converted to hexadecimal = 11.

Move Commands
Move the cursor forward a number of characters
F5 Move the cursor ahead “nn” characters from current cursor position.
Syntax = F5nn where nn is the numeric value (00-99) for the number of characters
the cursor should be moved ahead.
F5 Example: Move the cursor forward and send the data

Move the cursor forward 3 characters, then send the rest of the barcode data fromthe barcode above. End with a carriage return.
Command string: F503F10D
F5 is the “Move the cursor forward a number of characters” command
03 is the number of characters to move the cursor
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
4567890ABCDEFGHIJ<CR>

Move the cursor backward a number of characters
F6 Move the cursor back “nn” characters from current cursor position.
Syntax = F6nn where nn is the numeric value (00-99) for the number of characters
the cursor should be moved back.

Move the cursor to the beginning
F7 Move the cursor to the first character in the input message. Syntax = F7.

142

Xenon XP User GuideFE and F7 Example: Manipulate barcodes that begin with a 1

Search for barcodes that begin with a 1. If a barcode matches, move the cursor
back to the beginning of the data and send 6 characters followed by a carriage
return. Using the barcode above:
Command string: FE31F7F2060D
FE is the “Compare characters” command
31 is the hex value for 1
F7 is the “Move the cursor to the beginning” commandF2 is the “Send a number of characters” command
06 is the number of characters to send
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
123456<CR>

Move the cursor to the end
EA Move the cursor to the last character in the input message. Syntax = EA.

Search Commands
Search forward for a character
F8 Search the input message forward for “xx” character from the current cursor
position, leaving the cursor pointing to the “xx” character. Syntax = F8xx where xx
stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code.
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.
F8 Example: Send barcode data that starts after a particular character

Search for the letter “D” in barcodes and send all the data that follows, including
the “D.” Using the barcode above:
Command string: F844F10D
F8 is the “Search forward for a character” command
44 is the hex value for “D”

Xenon XP User Guide143

F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
DEFGHIJ<CR>

Search backward for a character
F9 Search the input message backward for “xx” character from the current cursor
position, leaving the cursor pointing to the “xx” character. Syntax = F9xx where xx
stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code.
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.

Search forward for a string
B0 Search forward for “s” string from the current cursor position, leaving cursor
pointing to “s” string. Syntax = B0nnnnS where nnnn is the string length (up to9999), and S consists of the ASCII hex value of each character in the match string.
For example, B0000454657374 will search forward for the first occurrence of the 4character string “Test.”
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.
B0 Example: Send barcode data that starts after a string of characters

Search for the letters “FGH” in barcodes and send all the data that follows,
including “FGH.” Using the barcode above:
Command string: B00003464748F10D
B0 is the “Search forward for a string” command
0003 is the string length (3 characters)
46 is the hex value for “F”
47 is the hex value for “G”
48 is the hex value for “H”
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
FGHIJ
<CR>

144

Xenon XP User Guide

Search backward for a string
B1 Search backward for “s” string from the current cursor position, leaving cursor
pointing to “s” string. Syntax = B1nnnnS where nnnn is the string length (up to9999), and S consists of the ASCII hex value of each character in the match string.
For example, B1000454657374 will search backward for the first occurrence of the
4 character string “Test.”
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.

Search forward for a non-matching character
E6 Search the input message forward for the first non-“xx” character from the current
cursor position, leaving the cursor pointing to the non-“xx” character. Syntax = E6xx
where xx stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code. Refer to the
ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for decimal, hex
and character codes.
E6 Example: Remove zeros at the beginning of barcode data

This example shows a barcode that has been zero filled. You may want to ignore thezeros and send all the data that follows. E6 searches forward for the first character
that is not zero, then sends all the data after, followed by a carriage return. Using
the barcode above:
Command string: E630F10D
E6 is the “Search forward for a non-matching character” command
30 is the hex value for 0
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
37692
<CR>

Search backward for a non-matching character
E7 Search the input message backward for the first non-“xx” character from thecurrent cursor position, leaving the cursor pointing to the non-“xx” character.
Syntax = E7xx where xx stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code.
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.

Xenon XP User Guide

145

Miscellaneous Commands
Suppress characters
FB Suppress all occurrences of up to 15 different characters, starting at the current
cursor position, as the cursor is advanced by other commands. When the FCcommand is encountered, the suppress function is terminated. The cursor is not
moved by the FB command.
Syntax = FBnnxxyy . .zz where nn is a count of the number of suppressed charactersin the list, and xxyy .. zz is the list of characters to be suppressed.
FB Example: Remove spaces in barcode data

This example shows a barcode that has spaces in the data. You may want to remove
the spaces before sending the data. Using the barcode above:
Command string: FB0120F10D
FB is the “Suppress characters” command
01 is the number of character types to be suppressed
20 is the hex value for a space
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
34567890<CR>

Stop suppressing characters
FC Disables suppress filter and clear all suppressed characters. Syntax = FC.

Replace characters
E4 Replaces up to 15 characters in the output message, without moving the cursor.
Replacement continues until the E5 command is encountered. Syntax =E4nnxx1xx2yy1yy2...zz1zz2 where nn is the total count of the number of charactersin the list (characters to be replaced plus replacement characters); xx1 definescharacters to be replaced and xx2 defines replacement characters, continuing
through zz1 and zz2.
E4 Example: Replace zeros with CRs in barcode data

146

Xenon XP User GuideIf the barcode has characters that the host application does not want included, you
can use the E4 command to replace those characters with something else. In thisexample, you will replace the zeros in the barcode above with carriage returns.
Command string: E402300DF10D
E4 is the “Replace characters” command
02 is the total count of characters to be replaced, plus the replacement characters(0 is replaced by CR, so total characters = 2)
30 is the hex value for 0
0D is the hex value for a CR (the character that will replace the 0)
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
The data is output as:
1234
5678
ABC
<CR>

Stop replacing characters
E5 Terminates character replacement. Syntax = E5.

Compare characters
FE Compare the character in the current cursor position to the character “xx.” Ifcharacters are equal, move the cursor forward one position. Syntax = FExx where xx
stands for the comparison character’s hex value for its ASCII code.
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.

Compare string
B2 Compare the string in the input message to the string “s.” If the strings are equal,
move the cursor forward past the end of the string. Syntax = B2nnnnS where nnnn
is the string length (up to 9999), and S consists of the ASCII hex value of eachcharacter in the match string. For example, B2000454657374 will compare thestring at the current cursor position with the 4 character string “Test.”
Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page 300 for
decimal, hex and character codes.

Check for a number
EC Check to make sure there is an ASCII number at the current cursor position. The
format is aborted if the character is not numeric.

Xenon XP User Guide147

EC Example: Only output the data if the barcode begins with a number
If you want only data from barcodes that begin with a number, you can use EC tocheck for the number.
Command string: ECF10DEC is the “Check for a number” command
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
If this barcode is read,the next data format, if there is one, will

be used on the data. If there is no other format, the format fails and the raw data is
output as AB1234.
If this barcode is read:the data is output as:

1234AB<CR>

Check for non-numeric character
ED Check to make sure there is a non-numeric ASCII character at the current cursor
position. The format is aborted if the character is numeric.
ED Example: Only output the data if the barcode begins with a letter
If you want only data from barcodes that begin with a letter, you can use ED tocheck for the letter.
Command string: EDF10D
ED is the “Check for a non-numeric character” command
F1 is the “Send all characters” command
0D is the hex value for a CR
If this barcode is read,the next data format, if there is one, will be

used on this data. If there is no other format, the format fails and the raw data is
output as 1234AB.
If this barcode is read:the data is output as:

AB1234<CR>

148

Xenon XP User Guide

Insert a delay
EF Inserts a delay of up to 49,995 milliseconds (in multiples of 5), starting from thecurrent cursor position. Syntax = EFnnnn where nnnn stands for the delay in 5ms
increments, up to 9999. This command can only be used with keyboard emulation.

Discard Data
B8 Discards types of data. For example, you may want to discard Code 128 barcodesthat begin with the letter A. In step 4 (page 134), select 6A (for Code 128), and in step
5, select 9999 (for all lengths). Enter FE41B8 to compare and discard Code 128
barcodes that begin with the letter A. Syntax = B8.
Note: The B8 command must be entered after all other commands.
The Data Format must be Required (see page 149) in order for the B8 command towork.
If Data Format is On, but Not Required (page 150), barcode data that meets the B8format is scanned and output as usual.
Because the data format needs to be On and Required (page 150) for the B8command, you must input data formats for all barcodes you wish to discard as well as
all barcodes you wish to output.
Other data format settings impact the B8 command. If Data Format Non-Match Error
Tone is On (page 150), the scanner emits an error tone. If Data format Non-Match
Error Tone is Off, the code is disabled for reading and no tone is sounded.

Data Formatter
When Data Formatter is turned Off, the barcode data is output to the host as read,including prefixes and suffixes.

Data Formatter Off

You may wish to require the data to conform to a data format you have created andsaved. The following settings can be applied to your data format:•

Data Formatter On, Not Required, Keep Prefix/Suffix
Scanned data is modified according to your data format, and prefixes andsuffixes are transmitted.

•

Data Formatter On, Not Required, Drop Prefix/Suffix
Scanned data is modified according to your data format. If a data format isfound for a particular symbol, those prefixes and suffixes are not transmitted. If
a data format is not found for that symbol, the prefixes and suffixes aretransmitted.

•

Data Format Required, Keep Prefix/Suffix
Scanned data is modified according to your data format, and prefixes andsuffixes are transmitted. Any data that does not match your data format

Xenon XP User Guide

149

requirements generates an error tone and the data in that barcode is nottransmitted. If you wish to process this type of barcode without generating anerror tone, see Data Format Non-Match Error Tone.
•

Data Format Required, Drop Prefix/Suffix
Scanned data is modified according to your data format. If a data format isfound for a particular symbol, those prefixes and suffixes are not transmitted.
Any data that does not match your data format requirements generates an error
tone. If you wish to process this type of barcode without generating an error
tone, see Data Format Non-Match Error Tone.

Choose one of the following options. Default = Data Formatter On, Not Required,
Keep Prefix/Suffix.

* Data Formatter On,
Not Required,
Keep Prefix/Suffix

Data Formatter On,
Not Required,
Drop Prefix/Suffix

Data Format Required,
Keep Prefix/Suffix

Data Format Required,
Drop Prefix/Suffix

Data Format Non-Match Error Tone
When a barcode is encountered that doesn’t match your required data format, thescanner normally generates an error tone. However, you may want to continue
scanning barcodes without hearing the error tone. If you scan the Data Format
Non-Match Error Tone Off barcode, data that doesn’t conform to your data format
is not transmitted, and no error tone will sound. If you wish to hear the error tone
when a non-matching barcode is found, scan the Data Format Non-Match Error
Tone On barcode. Default = Data Format Non-Match Error Tone On.

* Data Format Non-Match Error
Tone On

150

Xenon XP User GuideData Format Non-Match
Error Tone Off

Primary/Alternate Data Formats
You can save up to four data formats, and switch between these formats. Your
primary data format is saved under 0. Your other three formats are saved under 1,
2, and 3. To set your device to use one of these formats, scan one of the barcodes
below.

Primary Data Format

Data Format 1

Data Format 2

Data Format 3

Single Scan Data Format Change
You can also switch between data formats for a single scan. The next barcode isscanned using an alternate data format, then reverts to the format you haveselected above (either Primary, 1, 2, or 3).
For example, you may have set your device to the data format you saved as Data
Format 3. You can switch to Data Format 1 for a single trigger pull by scanning theSingle Scan-Data Format 1 barcode below. The next barcode that is scanned uses
Data Format 1, then reverts back to Data Format 3.

Single Scan-Primary
Data Format

Xenon XP User Guide

151

Single Scan-Data Format 1

Single Scan-Data Format 2

Single Scan-Data Format 3

152

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

8SYMBOLOGIESThis programming section contains the following menu selections. Refer to
Chapter 11 for settings and defaults.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

All Symbologies
Aztec CodeChina Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5)
Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) CodeCodabarCodablock A
Codablock F
Code 11
Code 128
Code 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF)
Code 39
Code 93•

Data Matrix

•
•
•
•
•
•

Digimarc Barcode™
DotCodeEAN/JAN-13
EAN/JAN-8
GS1 Composite Codes
GS1 DataBar Expanded•

GS1 DataBar Limited•••

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
GS1 Emulation
GS1-128

Xenon XP User Guide

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Interleaved 2 of 5
Korea Post
Label CodeMatrix 2 of 5
MaxiCode
MicroPDF417
MSI
NEC 2 of 5
Postal Codes - 2D
Postal Codes - Linear
PDF417
QR CodeStraight 2 of 5 IATA (two-bar start/
stop)

•

Straight 2 of 5 Industrial (three-bar
start/stop)

•
•
•
•
•

TCIF Linked Code 39 (TLC39)
TelepenTrioptic Code
UPC-A
UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended
Coupon Code
UPC-E0UPC-E1••

153

All Symbologies
For best scanner performance, you should only enable the symbologies that you
need. Scan All Symbologies Off to disable all symbologies, then enable thesymbologies you need by scanning the On barcode for each symbology.

All Symbologies Off

Message Length Description
You are able to set the valid reading length of some of the barcode symbologies.
You may wish to set the same value for minimum and maximum length to force thescanner to read fixed length barcode data. This helps reduce the chances of amisread.
Example: Decode only those barcodes with a count of 9-20 characters.
Min. length = 09
Max. length = 20
Example: Decode only those barcodes with a count of 15 characters.
Min. length = 15
Max. length = 15
For a value other than the minimum and maximum message length defaults, scan
the barcodes included in the explanation of the symbology, then scan the digit
value of the message length and Save barcodes from the Programming Chart,
beginning on page 311. The minimum and maximum lengths and the defaults areincluded with the respective symbologies.

Codabar<Default All Codabar Settings>

Codabar On/Off

* On

154

Xenon XP User GuideOff

Codabar Start/Stop Characters
Start/Stop characters identify the leading and trailing ends of the barcode. You
may either transmit, or not transmit Start/Stop characters. Default = Don’t
Transmit.

Transmit* Don’t Transmit

Codabar Check Character
Codabar check characters are created using different “modulos.” You can program
the scanner to read only Codabar barcodes with Modulo 16 check characters.
Default = No Check Character.
No Check Character indicates that the scanner reads and transmits barcode datawith or without a check character.
When Check Character is set to Validate and Transmit, the scanner will only read
Codabar barcodes printed with a check character, and will transmit this characterat the end of the scanned data.
When Check Character is set to Validate, but Don’t Transmit, the unit will only
read Codabar barcodes printed with a check character, but will not transmit thecheck character with the scanned data.

* No Check Character

Validate Modulo 16, but
Don’t Transmit

Validate Modulo 16
and Transmit

Xenon XP User Guide

155

Codabar Concatenation
Codabar supports symbol concatenation. When you enable concatenation, thescanner looks for a Codabar symbol having a “D” start character, adjacent to asymbol having a “D” stop character. In this case the two messages areconcatenated into one with the “D” characters omitted.

A 1 2 3 4 D

D 5 6 7 8 A

Select Require to prevent the scanner from decoding a single “D” Codabar symbol
without its companion. This selection has no effect on Codabar symbols without
Stop/Start D characters.

On

* Off

RequireCodabar Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 2-60. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 60.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length156

Xenon XP User Guide

Code 39
< Default All Code 39 Settings >Code 39 On/Off

* On

Off

If you are reading Code 39 barcodes, Codablock A should remain disabled. If you
are enabling Codablock A (see Codablock A on page 193), you should disable Code39.

Code 39 Start/Stop Characters
Start/Stop characters identify the leading and trailing ends of the barcode. You
may either transmit, or not transmit Start/Stop characters. Default = Don’t
Transmit.

Transmit* Don’t Transmit

Code 39 Check Character
No Check Character indicates that the scanner reads and transmits barcode datawith or without a check character.
When Check Character is set to Validate, but Don’t Transmit, the unit only reads
Code 39 barcodes printed with a check character, but will not transmit the checkcharacter with the scanned data.

Xenon XP User Guide

157

When Check Character is set to Validate and Transmit, the scanner only reads
Code 39 barcodes printed with a check character, and will transmit this characterat the end of the scanned data. Default = No Check Character.

* No Check Character

Validate, but Don’t Transmit

Validate and Transmit

Code 39 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 0-48. Minimum Default = 0, Maximum Default = 48.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Code 39 Append
This function allows the scanner to append the data from several Code 39
barcodes together before transmitting them to the host computer. When thescanner encounters a Code 39 barcode with the append trigger character(s), it
buffers Code 39 barcodes until it reads a Code 39 barcode that does not have theappend trigger. The data is then transmitted in the order in which the barcodes
were read (FIFO). Default = Off.

On

* Off

158

Xenon XP User Guide

Code 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF)
Code 32 Pharmaceutical is a form of the Code 39 symbology used by Italian
pharmacies. This symbology is also known as PARAF.
Note: Trioptic Code (page 193) must be turned off while scanning Code 32 Pharmaceuticalcodes.

On* Off

Full ASCIIIf Full ASCII Code 39 decoding is enabled, certain character pairs within thebarcode symbol will be interpreted as a single character. For example: $V will be
decoded as the ASCII character SYN, and /C will be decoded as the ASCII character#. Default = Off.
Full ASCII Table
NUL %U
SOH $A
STX $BETX $C
EOT $D
ENQ $E
ACK $F
BEL $G
BS $H
HT $I
LF $J
VT $K
FF $L
CR $M
SO $N
SI $O

DLE $P
DC1 $Q
DC2 $R
DC3 $S
DC4 $T
NAK $USYN $VETB $W
CAN $X
EM $Y
SUB $Z
ESC %A
FS %B
GS %C
RS %D
US %E

SP
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
.
/

SPACE
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
/J
/K
/L
.
/O

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J

@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O

%V
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O

P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_

P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
%K
%L
%M
%N
%O

‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o

%W
+A
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H
+I
+J
+K
+L
+M
+N
+O

p
+P
q
+Q
r
+R
s
+S
t
+T
u
+U
v
+V
w
+W
x
+X
y
+Y
z
+Z
{
%P
|
%Q
}
%R
~
%S
DEL %T

Character pairs /M and /N decode as a minus sign and period respectively.
Character pairs /P through /Y decode as 0 through 9.

Full ASCII On

Xenon XP User Guide159

* Full ASCII Off

Code 39 Code Page
Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters. If the data
received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because thebarcode being scanned was created using a code page that is different from theone the host program is expecting. If this is the case, scan the barcode below,
select the code page with which the barcodes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646
Character Replacements on page 304), and scan the value and the Save barcode
from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. The data characters should
then appear properly.

Code 39 Code Page

Interleaved 2 of 5
< Default All Interleaved 2 of 5 Settings >Interleaved 2 of 5 On/Off

* On

Off

Check Digit
No Check Digit indicates that the scanner reads and transmits barcode data withor without a check digit.
When Check Digit is set to Validate, but Don’t Transmit, the unit only reads
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes printed with a check digit, but will not transmit thecheck digit with the scanned data.

160

Xenon XP User Guide

When Check Digit is set to Validate and Transmit, the scanner only reads
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes printed with a check digit, and will transmit this digit at
the end of the scanned data. Default = No Check Digit.

* No Check Digit

Validate, but Don’t Transmit

Validate and Transmit

Interleaved 2 of 5 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 2-80. Minimum Default = 6, Maximum Default = 80.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

FEBRABAN Decode
Scan the barcodes below to turn FEBRABAN Boleto decoding on or off. Default =Off.

FEBRABAN Decode On*FEBRABAN Decode Off

Xenon XP User Guide

161

NEC 2 of 5
< Default All NEC 2 of 5 Settings >NEC 2 of 5 On/Off

* On

Off

Check Digit
No Check Digit indicates that the scanner reads and transmits barcode data withor without a check digit.
When Check Digit is set to Validate, but Don’t Transmit, the unit only reads NEC 2
of 5 barcodes printed with a check digit, but will not transmit the check digit withthe scanned data.
When Check Digit is set to Validate and Transmit, the scanner only reads NEC 2 of
5 barcodes printed with a check digit, and will transmit this digit at the end of thescanned data. Default = No Check Digit.

* No Check Digit

Validate, but Don’t Transmit

Validate and Transmit

162

Xenon XP User Guide

NEC 2 of 5 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 2-80. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 80.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Code 93< Default All Code 93 Settings >Code 93 On/Off

* On

Off

Code 93 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 0-80. Minimum Default = 0, Maximum Default = 80.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Xenon XP User Guide

163

Code 93 Append
This function allows the scanner to append the data from several Code 93
barcodes together before transmitting them to the host computer. When thisfunction is enabled, the scanner stores those Code 93 barcodes that start with aspace (excluding the start and stop symbols), and does not immediately transmit
the data. The scanner stores the data in the order in which the barcodes are read,deleting the first space from each. The scanner transmits the appended data when
it reads a Code 93 barcode that starts with a character other than a space. Default =
Off.

On

* Off

Code 93 Code Page
Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters. If the data
received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because thebarcode being scanned was created using a code page that is different from theone the host program is expecting. If this is the case, scan the barcode below,
select the code page with which the barcodes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646
Character Replacements on page 304), and scan the value and the Save barcode
from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. The data characters should
then appear properly.

Code 93 Code Page

164

Xenon XP User Guide

Straight 2 of 5 Industrial (three-bar start/stop)<Default All Straight 2 of 5 Industrial Settings>

Straight 2 of 5 Industrial On/Off

On

* Off

Straight 2 of 5 Industrial Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-48. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 48.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Xenon XP User Guide

165

Straight 2 of 5 IATA (two-bar start/stop)<Default All Straight 2 of 5 IATA Settings>

Straight 2 of 5 IATA On/Off

On

* Off

Straight 2 of 5 IATA Redundancy
If you are encountering errors when reading Straight 2 of 5 IATA barcodes, you may
want to adjust the redundancy count. Redundancy adjusts the number of times abarcode is decoded before transmission, which may reduce the number of errors.
Note that the higher the redundancy count, the longer it will take to decode thebarcode. To adjust the redundancy, scan the Straight 2 of 5 IATA Redundancy
barcode below, then scan a redundancy count between 0 and 10 on the
Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. Then scan the Save barcode. Default= 0.

Straight 2 of 5 IATA
Redundancy

Straight 2 of 5 IATA Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-48. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 48.

Minimum Message Length

166

Xenon XP User Guide

Maximum Message Length

Matrix 2 of 5
<Default All Matrix 2 of 5 Settings>

Matrix 2 of 5 On/Off

On

* Off

Matrix 2 of 5 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-80. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 80.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Xenon XP User Guide

167

Code 11
<Default All Code 11 Settings>

Code 11 On/Off

On

* Off

Check Digits Required
This option sets whether 1 or 2 check digits are required with Code 11 barcodes.
Default = Two Check Digits.

One Check Digit* Two Check Digits

Code 11 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-80. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 80.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

168

Xenon XP User Guide

Code 128
<Default All Code 128 Settings>

Code 128 On/Off

* On

Off

If you are reading Code 128 barcodes, Codablock F should remain disabled. If you
are enabling Codablock F (see Codablock F on page 194), you should disable Code128.

ISBT 128 Concatenation
In 1994 the International Society of Blood Transfusion (ISBT) ratified a standard
for communicating critical blood information in a uniform manner. The use of ISBT
formats requires a paid license. The ISBT 128 Application Specification describes1) the critical data elements for labeling blood products, 2) the current
recommendation to use Code 128 due to its high degree of security and its spaceefficient design, 3) a variation of Code 128 that supports concatenation ofneighboring symbols, and 4) the standard layout for barcodes on a blood productlabel. Use the barcodes below to turn concatenation on or off. Default =Off.

On

* Off

Code 128 Redundancy
If you are encountering errors when reading Code 128 barcodes, you may want toadjust the redundancy count. Redundancy adjusts the number of times a barcode
is decoded before transmission, which may reduce the number of errors. Note that

Xenon XP User Guide169

the higher the redundancy count, the longer it will take to decode the barcode. To
adjust the redundancy, scan the Code 128 Redundancy barcode below, then scan aredundancy count between 0 and 10 on the Programming Chart, beginning on
page 311. Then scan the Save barcode. Default = 0.

Code 128 Redundancy

Code 128 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 0-80. Minimum Default = 0, Maximum Default = 80.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Code 128 Append
This function allows the scanner to append the data from several Code 128
barcodes together before transmitting them to the host computer. When thescanner encounters a Code 128 barcode with the append trigger character(s), it
buffers Code 128 barcodes until it reads a Code 128 barcode that does not havethe append trigger. The data is then transmitted in the order in which the barcodes
were read (FIFO). Default = Off.

On

* Off

Code 128 Code Page
Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters. If the data
received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because thebarcode being scanned was created using a code page that is different from theone the host program is expecting. If this is the case, scan the barcode below,
select the code page with which the barcodes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646

170

Xenon XP User Guide

Character Replacements on page 304), and scan the value and the Save barcode
from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. The data characters should
then appear properly.

Code 128 Code Page

GS1-128<Default All GS1-128 Settings>

GS1-128 On/Off

* On

Off

GS1-128 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-80. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 80.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Xenon XP User Guide

171

Telepen<Default All Telepen Settings>

Telepen On/Off

On

* Off

Telepen Output
Using AIM Telepen Output, the scanner reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1
and decodes them as standard full ASCII (start/stop pattern 1). When Original
Telepen Output is selected, the scanner reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1
and decodes them as compressed numeric with optional full ASCII (start/stop
pattern 2). Default = AIM Telepen Output.

* AIM Telepen Output

Original Telepen Output

Telepen Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-60. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 60.

Minimum Message Length172

Xenon XP User Guide

Maximum Message Length

UPC-A<Default All UPC-A Settings>

UPC-A On/Off

* On

Off

Note: To convert UPC-A barcodes to EAN-13, see Convert UPC-A to EAN-13 on page 180.

UPC-A Check Digit
This selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted
at the end of the scanned data or not. Default = On.

* On

Off

Xenon XP User Guide

173

UPC-A Number System
The numeric system digit of a U.P.C. symbol is normally transmitted at the
beginning of the scanned data, but can be programmed so it is not transmitted(Off). Default = On.

* On

Off

UPC-A Addenda
This selection adds 2 or 5 digits to the end of all scanned UPC-A data.
Default = Off for both 2 Digit and 5 Digit Addenda.

2 Digit Addenda On* 2 Digit Addenda Off

5 Digit Addenda On* 5 Digit Addenda Off

UPC-A Addenda Required
When Required is scanned, the scanner will only read UPC-A barcodes that haveaddenda. You must then turn on a 2 or 5 digit addenda listed on page 174.
Default = Not Required.

Required174

Xenon XP User Guide

* Not Required

Addenda Timeout
You can set a time during which the scanner looks for an addenda. If an addenda is
not found within this time period, the data can be either transmitted or discarded,based on the setting you are using for UPC-A Addenda Required. Set the length (inmilliseconds) for this timeout by scanning the barcode below, then setting thetimeout (from 0-120 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the Programming
Chart, beginning on page 311 of this manual, then Save. Default = 500.
Note: The Addenda Timeout setting is applied to all addenda and coupon code searches.

Addenda Timeout

UPC-A Addenda Separator
When this feature is On, there is a space between the data from the barcode andthe data from the addenda. When turned Off, there is no space. Default = On.

* On

Off

UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended Coupon CodeUse the following codes to enable or disable UPC-A and EAN-13 with Extended
Coupon Code. When left on the default setting (Off), the scanner treats Coupon
Codes and Extended Coupon Codes as single barcodes.
If you scan the Allow Concatenation code, when the scanner sees the coupon
code and the extended coupon code in a single scan, it transmits both as one
symbologies. Otherwise, it transmits the first coupon code it reads.

Xenon XP User Guide

175

If you scan the Require Concatenation code, the scanner must see and read the
coupon code and extended coupon code in a single read to transmit the data. No
data is output unless both codes are read. Default = Off.

* Off

Allow Concatenation

Require Concatenation

Addenda Timeout
You can set a time during which the scanner looks for an addenda. If an addenda is
not found within this time period, the data can be either transmitted or discarded,based on the setting you are using for UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended Coupon
Code. Set the length (in milliseconds) for this timeout by scanning the barcode
below, then setting the timeout (from 0-120 milliseconds) by scanning digits fromthe Programming Chart, beginning on page 311 of this manual, then Save. Default= 500.
Note: The Addenda Timeout setting is applied to all addenda and coupon code searches.

Addenda Timeout

Coupon GS1 DataBar Output
If you scan coupons that have both UPC and GS1 Databar codes, you may wish toscan and output only the data from the GS1 Databar code. Scan the GS1 Output
On code below to scan and output only the GS1 Databar code data. Default = GS1
Output Off.

* GS1 Output Off

GS1 Output On

176

Xenon XP User Guide

UPC-E0<Default All UPC-E Settings>

UPC-E0 On/Off
Most U.P.C. barcodes lead with the 0 number system. To read these codes, use the
UPC-E0 On selection. If you need to read codes that lead with the 1 number
system, use UPC-E1 (page 179). Default = On.

* UPC-E0 On

UPC-E0 Off

UPC-E0 Expand
UPC-E Expand expands the UPC-E code to the 12 digit, UPC-A format.
Default = Off.

On

* Off

UPC-E0 Addenda Required
When Required is scanned, the scanner will only read UPC-E barcodes that haveaddenda. Default = Not Required.

Required* Not Required

Xenon XP User Guide

177Addenda Timeout
You can set a time during which the scanner looks for an addenda. If an addenda is
not found within this time period, the data can be either transmitted or discarded,based on the setting you are using for UPC-E0 Addenda Required. Set the length(in milliseconds) for this timeout by scanning the barcode below, then setting thetimeout (from 0-120 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the Programming
Chart, beginning on page 311 of this manual, then Save. Default = 500.
Note: The Addenda Timeout setting is applied to all addenda and coupon code searches.

Addenda Timeout

UPC-E0 Addenda Separator
When this feature is On, there is a space between the data from the barcode andthe data from the addenda. When turned Off, there is no space. Default = On.

* On

Off

UPC-E0 Check Digit
Check Digit specifies whether the check digit should be transmitted at the end of
the scanned data or not. Default = On.

* On

Off

178

Xenon XP User Guide

UPC-E0 Leading Zero
This feature allows the transmission of a leading zero (0) at the beginning of
scanned data. To prevent transmission, scan Off. Default = On.

* On

Off

UPC-E0 Addenda
This selection adds 2 or 5 digits to the end of all scanned UPC-E data. Default = Offfor both 2 Digit and 5 Digit Addenda.

2 Digit Addenda On* 2 Digit Addenda Off

5 Digit Addenda On* 5 Digit Addenda Off

UPC-E1
Most U.P.C. barcodes lead with the 0 number system. For these codes, use UPC-E0(page 177). If you need to read codes that lead with the 1 number system, use the
UPC-E1 On selection. Default = Off.

UPC-E1 On

Xenon XP User Guide179

* UPC-E1 Off

EAN/JAN-13<Default All EAN/JAN Settings>

EAN/JAN-13 On/Off

* On

Off

Convert UPC-A to EAN-13
When UPC-A Converted to EAN-13 is selected, UPC-A barcodes are converted to
13 digit EAN-13 codes by adding a zero to the front. When Do not Convert UPC-A
is selected, UPC-A codes are read as UPC-A.

UPC-A Converted to EAN-13* Do not Convert UPC-A

180

Xenon XP User GuideEAN/JAN-13 Check Digit
This selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted
at the end of the scanned data or not. Default = On.

* On

Off

EAN/JAN-13 Addenda
This selection adds 2 or 5 digits to the end of all scanned EAN/JAN-13 data.
Default = Off for both 2 Digit and 5 Digit Addenda.

2 Digit Addenda On* 2 Digit Addenda Off

5 Digit Addenda On* 5 Digit Addenda Off

EAN/JAN-13 Addenda Required
When Required is scanned, the scanner will only read EAN/JAN-13 barcodes thathave addenda. Default = Not Required.

Required* Not Required

Xenon XP User Guide

181

EAN-13 Beginning with 290 Addenda Required
This setting programs the scanner to require a 5 digit addenda only on EAN-13
barcodes that begin with “290.” The following settings can be programmed:
Require 5 Digit Addenda: All EAN-13 barcodes that begin with “290” must have a
5 digit addendum. The EAN-13 barcode with the 5 digit addendum is thentransmitted as a single, concatenated barcode. If a 5 digit addendum is not foundwithin the Addenda Timeout period, the EAN-13 barcode is discarded.
Note: If you are using EAN-13 Beginning with 290 Addenda Required (page 182), thissetting will take precedence.
Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda: If you have selected Require 5 Digit Addenda, andyou want to disable this feature, scan Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda. EAN-13
barcodes are transmitted, depending on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-13
Addenda Required.
Default = Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda.

* Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda

Require 5 Digit Addenda

EAN-13 Beginning with 378/379 Addenda Required
This setting programs the scanner to require any combination of a 2 digit addenda
or a 5 digit addenda on EAN-13 barcodes that begin with a “378” or “379.” Thefollowing settings can be programmed:
Require Addenda: All EAN-13 barcodes that begin with a “378” or “379” must havea 2 digit addenda, a 5 digit addenda, or a combination of these addenda. The EAN13 barcode with the addenda is then transmitted as a single, concatenatedbarcode. If the required addenda is not found within the Addenda Timeout period,
the EAN-13 barcode is discarded.
Don’t Require Addenda: If you have selected Require Addenda, and you want todisable this feature, scan Don’t Require Addenda. EAN-13 barcodes aretransmitted, depending on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-13 Addenda
Required.

182

Xenon XP User Guide

Default = Don’t Require Addenda.

* Don’t Require Addenda

Require 2 Digit Addenda

Require 5 Digit Addenda

Require 2 or 5 Digit Addenda

EAN-13 Beginning with 414/419 Addenda Required
This setting programs the scanner to require any combination of a 2 digit addenda
or a 5 digit addenda on EAN-13 barcodes that begin with a “414” or “419.” Thefollowing settings can be programmed:
Require Addenda: All EAN-13 barcodes that begin with a “414” or “419” must havea 2 digit addenda, a 5 digit addenda, or a combination of these addenda. The EAN13 barcode with the addenda is then transmitted as a single, concatenatedbarcode. If the required addenda is not found within the Addenda Timeout period,
the EAN-13 barcode is discarded.
Don’t Require Addenda: If you have selected Require Addenda, and you want todisable this feature, scan Don’t Require Addenda. EAN-13 barcodes aretransmitted, depending on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-13 Addenda
Required.
Default = Don’t Require Addenda.

* Don’t Require Addenda

Require 2 Digit Addenda

Require 5 Digit Addenda

Xenon XP User Guide

183

Require 2 or 5 Digit Addenda

EAN-13 Beginning with 434/439 Addenda Required
This setting programs the scanner to require any combination of a 2 digit addenda
or a 5 digit addenda on EAN-13 barcodes that begin with a “434” or “439.” Thefollowing settings can be programmed:
Require Addenda: All EAN-13 barcodes that begin with a “434” or “439” must havea 2 digit addenda, a 5 digit addenda, or a combination of these addenda. The EAN13 barcode with the addenda is then transmitted as a single, concatenatedbarcode. If the required addenda is not found within the Addenda Timeout period,
the EAN-13 barcode is discarded.
Don’t Require Addenda: If you have selected Require Addenda, and you want todisable this feature, scan Don’t Require Addenda. EAN-13 barcodes aretransmitted, depending on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-13 Addenda
Required.
Default = Don’t Require Addenda.

* Don’t Require Addenda

Require 2 Digit Addenda

Require 5 Digit Addenda

Require 2 or 5 Digit Addenda

EAN-13 Beginning with 977 Addenda Required
This setting programs the scanner to require a 2 digit addenda only on EAN-13
barcodes that begin with “977.” The following settings can be programmed:
Require 2 Digit Addenda: All EAN-13 barcodes that begin with “977” must have a
2 digit addendum. The EAN-13 barcode with the 2 digit addendum is thentransmitted as a single, concatenated barcode. If a 2 digit addendum is not foundwithin the Addenda Timeout period, the EAN-13 barcode is discarded.

184

Xenon XP User Guide

Don’t Require 2 Digit Addenda: If you have selected Require 2 Digit Addenda, andyou want to disable this feature, scan Don’t Require 2 Digit Addenda. EAN-13
barcodes are transmitted, depending on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-13
Addenda Required.
Default = Don’t Require 2 Digit Addenda.

* Don’t Require 2 Digit Addenda

Require 2 Digit Addenda

EAN-13 Beginning with 978 Addenda Required
These settings program the scanner to require a 5 digit addenda only on EAN-13
barcodes that begin with “978.” The following settings can be programmed:
Require 5 Digit Addenda: All EAN-13 barcodes that begin with “978” must have a
5 digit addendum. The EAN-13 barcode with the 5 digit addendum is thentransmitted as a single, concatenated barcode. If a 5 digit addendum is not foundwithin the Addenda Timeout period, the EAN-13 barcode is discarded.
Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda: If you have selected Require 5 Digit Addenda, andyou want to disable this feature, scan Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda. EAN-13
barcodes are transmitted, depending on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-13
Addenda Required.
Default = Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda.

* Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda

Require 5 Digit Addenda

EAN-13 Beginning with 979 Addenda Required
These settings program the scanner to require a 5 digit addenda only on EAN-13
barcodes that begin with “979.” The following settings can be programmed:
Require 5 Digit Addenda: All EAN-13 barcodes that begin with “979” must have a
5 digit addendum. The EAN-13 barcode with the 5 digit addendum is thentransmitted as a single, concatenated barcode. If a 5 digit addendum is not foundwithin the Addenda Timeout period, the EAN-13 barcode is discarded.

Xenon XP User Guide

185

Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda: If you have selected Require 5 Digit Addenda, andyou want to disable this feature, scan Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda. EAN-13
barcodes are transmitted, depending on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-13
Addenda Required.
Default = Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda.

* Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda

Require 5 Digit Addenda

Addenda Timeout
You can set a time during which the scanner looks for an addenda. If an addenda is
not found within this time period, the data can be either transmitted or discarded,based on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-13 Addenda Required. Set thelength (in milliseconds) for this timeout by scanning the barcode below, thensetting the timeout (from 0-120 milliseconds) by scanning digits from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311 of this manual, then Save. Default =500.
Note: The Addenda Timeout setting is applied to all addenda and coupon code searches.

Addenda Timeout

EAN/JAN-13 Addenda Separator
When this feature is On, there is a space between the data from the barcode andthe data from the addenda. When turned Off, there is no space. Default = On.

* On

Off

Note: If you want to enable or disable EAN13 with Extended Coupon Code, refer to UPC-A/
EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code (page 175).

186

Xenon XP User Guide

ISBN Translate
When On is scanned, EAN-13 Bookland symbols are translated into theirequivalent ISBN number format. Default = Off.

On

* Off

EAN/JAN-8<Default All EAN/JAN-8 Settings>

EAN/JAN-8 On/Off
* On

Off

EAN/JAN-8 Check Digit
This selection allows you to specify whether or not the check digit should betransmitted at the end of the scanned data. Default = On.

* On

Off

Xenon XP User Guide

187

EAN/JAN-8 Addenda
This selection adds 2 or 5 digits to the end of all scanned EAN/JAN-8 data.
Default = Off for both 2 Digit and 5 Digit Addenda.

2 Digit Addenda On* 2 Digit Addenda Off

5 Digit Addenda On* 5 Digit Addenda Off

EAN/JAN-8 Addenda Required
When Required is scanned, the scanner will only read EAN/JAN-8 barcodes thathave addenda. Default = Not Required.

Required* Not Required

Addenda Timeout
You can set a time during which the scanner looks for an addenda. If an addenda is
not found within this time period, the data can be either transmitted or discarded,based on the setting you are using for EAN/JAN-8 Addenda Required. Set thelength (in milliseconds) for this timeout by scanning the barcode below, then188

Xenon XP User Guidesetting the timeout (from 0-120 milliseconds) by scanning digits from theProgramming Chart, beginning on page 311 of this manual, then Save. Default =500.
Note: The Addenda Timeout setting is applied to all addenda and coupon code searches.

Addenda Timeout

EAN/JAN-8 Addenda Separator
When this feature is On, there is a space between the data from the barcode andthe data from the addenda. When turned Off, there is no space. Default = On.

* On

Off

MSI
<Default All MSI Settings>

MSI On/Off

On

* Off

Xenon XP User Guide

189

MSI Check Character
Different types of check characters are used with MSI barcodes. You can program
the scanner to read MSI barcodes with Type 10 check characters. Default = Validate
Type 10, but Don’t Transmit.
When Check Character is set to Validate Type 10/11 and Transmit, the scanner
will only read MSI barcodes printed with the specified type check character(s), andwill transmit the character(s) at the end of the scanned data.
When Check Character is set to Validate Type 10/11, but Don’t Transmit, the unit
will only read MSI barcodes printed with the specified type check character(s), butwill not transmit the check character(s) with the scanned data.

* Validate Type 10, but Don’t
Transmit

Validate Type 10 and Transmit

Validate 2 Type 10 Characters,
but Don’t Transmit

Validate 2 Type 10 Characters
and Transmit

Validate Type 11 then Type 10
Character, but Don’t Transmit

Validate Type 11 thenType 10 Character and Transmit

Disable MSI Check Characters

190

Xenon XP User Guide

MSI Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 4-48. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 48.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional< Default All GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional Settings >GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional On/Off
* On

Off

Xenon XP User Guide

191

GS1 DataBar Limited< Default All GS1 DataBar Limited Settings >GS1 DataBar Limited On/Off

* On

Off

GS1 DataBar Expanded< Default All GS1 DataBar Expanded Settings >GS1 DataBar Expanded On/Off

* On

Off

GS1 DataBar Expanded Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 4-74. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 74.

Minimum Message Length

192

Xenon XP User Guide

Maximum Message Length

Trioptic CodeNote: If you are going to scan Code 32 Pharmaceutical codes (page 159), Trioptic Codemust be off.
Trioptic Code is used for labeling magnetic storage media.

On

* Off

Codablock A<Default All Codablock A Settings>

Codablock A On/Off
On

* Off

If you are reading Code 39 barcodes, Codablock A should remain disabled. If you
are enabling Codablock A, you should disable Code 39 (see Code 39 on page 157).

Xenon XP User Guide

193

Codablock A Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-600. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 600.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Codablock F<Default All Codablock F Settings>

Codablock F On/Off
On

* Off

If you are reading Code 128 barcodes, Codablock F should remain disabled. If you
are enabling Codablock F, you should disable Code 128 (see Code 128 on page
169).

Codablock F Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-2048. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 2048.

Minimum Message Length

194

Xenon XP User Guide

Maximum Message Length

Label CodeThe standard Label Code is used in libraries. Default = Off.

On

*Off

PDF417< Default All PDF417 Settings >PDF417 On/Off

* On

Off

Xenon XP User Guide

195

PDF417 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-2750. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 2750.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

MacroPDF417
MacroPDF417 is an implementation of PDF417 capable of encoding very large
amounts of data into multiple PDF417 barcodes. When this selection is enabled,these multiple barcodes are assembled into a single data string. Default = On.

* On

Off

MicroPDF417< Default All MicroPDF417 Settings >MicroPDF417 On/Off
On

196

Xenon XP User Guide

* OffMicroPDF417 Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-366. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 366.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

GS1 Composite Codes
Linear codes are combined with a unique 2D composite component to form a newclass called GS1 Composite symbology. GS1 Composite symbologies allow for theco-existence of symbologies already in use. Default = Off.

On

* Off

Xenon XP User Guide

197

UPC/EAN Version
Scan the UPC/EAN Version On barcode to decode GS1 Composite symbols thathave a U.P.C. or an EAN linear component. (This does not affect GS1 Composite
symbols with a GS1-128 or GS1 linear component.) Default = UPC/EAN Version Off.

UPC/EAN Version On* UPC/EAN Version Off

Note: If you scan coupons that have both UPC and GS1 Databar codes, you may wish toscan and output only the data from the GS1 Databar code. See Coupon GS1 DataBar
Output (page 176) for further information.

GS1 Composite Code Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-2435. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 2435.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

GS1 Emulation
The scanner can automatically format the output from any GS1 data carrier toemulate what would be encoded in an equivalent GS1-128 or GS1 DataBar symbol.
GS1 data carriers include UPC-A and UPC-E, EAN-13 and EAN-8, ITF-14, GS1128, and GS1 DataBar and GS1 Composites. (Any application that accepts GS1
data can be simplified since it only needs to recognize one data carrier type.)
If GS1-128 Emulation is scanned, all retail codes (U.P.C., UPC-E, EAN8, EAN13)
are expanded out to 16 digits. If the AIM ID is enabled, the value will be the GS1128 AIM ID, ]C1 (see Symbology Charts on page 297).
If GS1 DataBar Emulation is scanned, all retail codes (U.P.C., UPC-E, EAN8,
EAN13) are expanded out to 16 digits. If the AIM ID is enabled, the value will be theGS1-DataBar AIM ID, ]em (see Symbology Charts on page 297).

198

Xenon XP User GuideIf GS1 Code Expansion Off is scanned, retail code expansion is disabled, and UPCE expansion is controlled by the UPC-E0 Expand (page 177) setting. If the AIM ID
is enabled, the value will be the GS1-128 AIM ID, ]C1 (see Symbology Charts on
page 297).
If EAN8 to EAN13 Conversion is scanned, all EAN8 barcodes are converted to
EAN13 format.
Default = GS1 Emulation Off.

GS1-128 Emulation

GS1 DataBar Emulation

GS1 Code Expansion Off

EAN8 to EAN13 Conversion* GS1 Emulation Off

TCIF Linked Code 39 (TLC39)
This code is a composite code since it has a Code 39 linear component and a
MicroPDF417 stacked code component. All barcode readers are capable of reading
the Code 39 linear component. The MicroPDF417 component can only be decoded
if TLC39 On is selected. The linear component may be decoded as Code 39 even if
TLC39 is off. Default = Off.

On

* Off

Xenon XP User Guide199

QR Code< Default All QR Code Settings >QR Code On/Off
This selection applies to both QR Code and Micro QR Code.

* On

Off

QR Code Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-7089. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 7089.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

QR Code Append
This function allows the scanner to append the data from several QR Codebarcodes together before transmitting them to the host computer. When thescanner encounters an QR Code barcode with the append trigger character(s), it
buffers the number of QR Code barcodes determined by information encoded inthose barcodes. Once the proper number of codes is reached, the data is output inthe order specified in the barcodes. There are 3 ways to scan appended QR Code:One Scan: Pull the trigger one time and all appended QR Codes in the same image
are decoded.

200

Xenon XP User Guide

Swipe: Pull and hold down the trigger and scan all appended QR Codes while
keeping the trigger pressed. The scanner emits short beeps for each partial QR
Code that is scanned and buffered. One long beep is emitted after the last QR Codeis scanned and the data is complete. Not compatible with Presentation mode.
Point and Shoot: Pull the trigger one time for each image. The scanner emits ashort beep for each partial QR Code that is scanned and buffered. One long beep isemitted after the last QR Code is scanned and the data is complete. Not compatible
with Presentation mode.
Default = One Scan.

* One Scan

Swipe

Point and ShootOffQR Code Page
QR Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters. If the data
received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because thebarcode being scanned was created using a code page that is different from theone the host program is expecting. If this is the case, scan the barcode below,
select the code page with which the barcodes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646
Character Replacements on page 304), and scan the value and the Save barcode
from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. The data characters should
then appear properly.

QR Code Page

Xenon XP User Guide

201

DotCode< Default All DotCode Settings >DotCode On/Off
On

* Off

Poor Quality DotCodes
This setting improves the scanner’s ability to read damaged or badly printed
DotCodes. Default = Poor Quality DotCodes Off.

Poor Quality DotCodes On* Poor Quality DotCodes Off

DotCode Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-2400. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 2400.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

202

Xenon XP User Guide

Digimarc Barcode™
Digimarc Decoder Attempts
Set the number of attempts by scanning the barcode below, then setting thenumber of attempts (0-10) by scanning digits from the Programming Chart
beginning on page 311 of this manual, the Save. Minimum to Maximum attempts =0-10. Default = 3.

Digimarc Decoder Attempts

Digimarc BarcodeThis setting programs the scanner to decode Digimarc Barcode using Digimarc
and ID decoders. When Digimarc Barcode is set to On, the Digimarc decoder isused on most frames and the ID decoder will read every fifth frame.
When Digimarc Barcode is set to Uses ID Decoder then Both Decoders, the ID
decoder will read the number of attempts set by the Digimarc Decoder Attempts
and then will use both ID and Digimarc decoders. When Digimarc Barcode is set toUses Digimarc Decoder then Both Decoders, the Digimarc decoder will read thenumber of attempts set by the Digimarc Decoder Attempts and then will use both
ID and Digimarc decoders.
When Digimarc Barcdoe is set to Uses ID Decoder then Alternates Decoders, theID decoder will read the number of attempts set by the Digimarc Decoder Attempts
and then will alternate between ID and Digimarc decoders. When Digimarc
Barcode is set to Uses Digimarc Decoder then Alternates Decoders, the Digimarc
decoder will read the number of attempts set by the Digimarc Decoder Attempts
and then will alternate between ID and Digimarc decoders.
Default = Uses Digimarc Decoder then Both Decoders.

Off

On

Uses ID Decoder then Both
Decoders

Xenon XP User Guide203

* Uses Digimarc Decoder thenBoth Decoders

Uses ID Decoder thenAlternates Decoders

Uses Digimarc Decoder thenAlternates Decoders

Data Matrix< Default All Data Matrix Settings >Data Matrix On/Off
* On

Off

Direct Part Marking Decoding
If you are having trouble reading Direct Part Marking (DPM) barcodes, scan
Dotpeen DPM Decoding for Dotpeen codes or scan Reflective (Etched) DPM
Decoding for reflective (etched) codes. Default = Disable DPM Decoding.

Dotpeen DPM Decoding

204

Xenon XP User Guide

* Disable DPM Decoding

Reflective (Etched) DPM
Decoding

Data Matrix Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-3116. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 3116.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Data Matrix Code Page
Data Matrix Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters. If thedata received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because thebarcode being scanned was created using a code page that is different from theone the host program is expecting. If this is the case, scan the barcode below,
select the code page with which the barcodes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646
Character Replacements on page 304), and scan the value and the Save barcode
from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. The data characters should
then appear properly.

Data Matrix Code Page

Xenon XP User Guide

205

MaxiCode< Default All MaxiCode Settings >MaxiCode On/Off

On

* Off

MaxiCode Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-150. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 150.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length206

Xenon XP User GuideAztec Code< Default All Aztec Code Settings >Aztec Code On/Off

* On

Off

Aztec Code Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-3832. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 3832.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Aztec Append
This function allows the scanner to append the data from several Aztec barcodes
together before transmitting them to the host computer. When the scannerencounters an Aztec barcode with the append trigger character(s), it buffers thenumber of Aztec barcodes determined by information encoded in those barcodes.
Once the proper number of codes is reached, the data is output in the orderspecified in the barcodes. Default = On.

* On

Xenon XP User Guide

207

Off

Aztec Code Page
Aztec Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters. If the data
received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because thebarcode being scanned was created using a code page that is different from theone the host program is expecting. If this is the case, scan the barcode below,
select the code page with which the barcodes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646
Character Replacements on page 304), and scan the value and the Save barcode
from the Programming Chart, beginning on page 311. The data characters should
then appear properly.

Aztec Code Page

Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) Code< Default All Han Xin Settings >Han Xin Code On/Off
On

* Off

208

Xenon XP User GuideHan Xin Code Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 1-7833. Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 7833.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Postal Codes - 2D
The following lists the possible 2D postal codes, and 2D postal code combinations
that are allowed. Only one 2D postal code selection can be active at a time. If you
scan a second 2D postal code selection, the first selection is overwritten.
Default = 2D Postal Codes Off.

* 2D Postal Codes Off

Single 2D Postal Codes:

Australian Post On

British Post On

Canadian Post On

Intelligent Mail Barcode On

Xenon XP User Guide

209

Japanese Post On

KIX Post On

Planet Code On

Also see Planet Code Check
Digit, page 212.

Postal-4i On

Postnet On

Also see Postnet Check
Digit, page 213.

Postnet with B and B’ Fields On

InfoMail On

Combination 2D Postal Codes:

InfoMail and British
Post OnIntelligent Mail Barcode andPostnet with B and B’ Fields On

210

Xenon XP User GuidePostnet andPostal-4i On

Postnet andIntelligent Mail Barcode On

Postal-4i andIntelligent Mail Barcode On

Postal-4i and
Postnet with B and B’ Fields On

Planet Code andPostnet On

Planet Code andPostnet with B and B’ Fields On

Planet Code andPostal-4i On

Planet Code andIntelligent Mail Barcode

Planet Code,
Postnet, andPostal-4i On

Planet Code,
Postnet, andIntelligent Mail Barcode On

Xenon XP User Guide

211

Planet Code,
Postal-4i, andIntelligent Mail Barcode On

Postnet,Postal-4i, andIntelligent Mail Barcode On

Planet Code,
Postal-4i, andPostnet with B and B’ Fields On

Planet Code,Intelligent Mail Barcode, andPostnet with B and B’ Fields On

Postal-4i,
Intelligent Mail Barcode, andPostnet with B and B’ Fields On

Planet Code,
Postal-4i,
Intelligent Mail Barcode, andPostnet On

Planet Code,
Postal-4i,
Intelligent Mail Barcode, andPostnet with B and B’ Fields On

Planet Code Check Digit
This selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted
at the end of Planet Code data. Default = Don’t Transmit.

Transmit Check Digit

212

Xenon XP User Guide

* Don’t Transmit Check Digit

Postnet Check Digit
This selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted
at the end of Postnet data. Default = Don’t Transmit.

Transmit Check Digit* Don’t Transmit Check Digit

Australian Post Interpretation
This option controls what interpretation is applied to customer fields in Australian
4-State symbols.
Bar Output lists the bar patterns in “0123” format.
Numeric N Table causes that field to be interpreted as numeric data using the N
Table.
Alphanumeric C Table causes the field to be interpreted as alphanumeric datausing the C Table. Refer to the Australian Post Specification Tables.
Combination C and N Tables causes the field to be interpreted using either the C
or N Tables.

* Bar Output

Numeric N Table

Alphanumeric C Table

Xenon XP User Guide

213

Combination C and N Tables

Postal Codes - Linear
The following lists linear postal codes. Any combination of linear postal code
selections can be active at a time.

China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5)<Default All China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) Settings>

China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) On/Off

On

* Off

China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 2-80. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 80.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length214

Xenon XP User Guide

Korea Post
<Default All Korea Post Settings>

Korea Post

On

* Off

Korea Post Message Length
Scan the barcodes below to change the message length. Refer to Message Length
Description (page 154) for additional information. Minimum and Maximum
lengths = 2-80. Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 48.

Minimum Message Length

Maximum Message Length

Korea Post Check Digit
This selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted
or not. Default = Don’t Transmit.

Transmit Check Digit* Don’t Transmit Check Digit

Xenon XP User Guide

215

216

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER9IMAGING COMMANDS

The scanner is like a digital camera in the way it captures, manipulates, andtransfers images. The following commands allow you to alter the way the scannerperforms these functions.
Note: If you are using the scanner in a stand, you must set the In-Stand Sensor Mode to Off
in order to take images (see In-Stand Sensor Mode on page 94).

Single-Use Basis
Imaging Commands with their modifiers send instructions to the scanner on asingle-use basis, and take effect for a single image capture. Once that capture iscomplete, the scanner reverts to its imaging default settings. If you want topermanently change a setting, you must use the serial default commands (seeChapter 11). When the serial default command is used, that selection becomes thenew, permanent setting for the scanner.

Command Syntax
Multiple modifiers and commands can be issued within one sequence. If additional
modifiers are to be applied to the same command, just add the modifiers to thatcommand. For example, to add 2 modifiers to the Image Snap command, such as
setting the Imaging Style to 1P and the Wait for Trigger to 1T, you would enter
IMGSNP1P1T.
Note: After processing an image capture command (IMGSNP or IMGBOX), you must follow
it with an IMGSHP command if you want to see it on your terminal.
To add a command to a sequence, each new command is separated with asemicolon. For example, to add the Image Ship command to the above sequence,
you would enter IMGSNP1P1T;IMGSHP.
The imaging commands are:Image Snap - IMGSNP (page 218)

Xenon XP User Guide

217

Image Ship - IMGSHP (page 221)Intelligent Signature Capture - IMGBOX (page 230)
The modifiers for each of these commands follow the command description.
Note: The images included with each command description are examples only. The results
you achieve may be different from those included in this manual. The quality of theoutput you receive will vary depending on lighting, quality of the initial image/object
being captured, and distance of the scanner from the image/object. To achieve a highquality image, it is recommended that you position your scanner 4-6" (10.2-15.2 cm)
away from the image/object you are capturing.

Step 1 - Take a Picture Using IMGSNPImage Snap - IMGSNPAn image is taken whenever the hardware trigger is pressed, or when the Image
Snap (IMGSNP) command is processed.
The image snap command has many different modifiers that can be used tochange the look of the image in memory. Any number of modifiers may beappended to the IMGSNP command.
Example: You can use the following command to snap an image, increase the gain, and havethe beeper sound once the snap is complete: IMGSNP2G1B

IMGSNP Modifiers
P - Imaging Style
This sets the Image Snap style.

218

0P

Decoding Style. This processing allows a few frames to be taken until the
exposure parameters are met. The last frame is then available for further
use.

1P

Photo Style (default). This mimics a simple digital camera, and results ina visually optimized image.

2P

Manual Style. This is an advanced style that should only be used by anexperienced user. It allows you the most freedom to set up the scanner,and has no auto-exposure.

Xenon XP User GuideB - Beeper
Causes a beep to sound after an image is snapped.
0B

No beep (default)

1B

Sounds a beep when the image is captured.

T - Wait for Trigger
Waits for a hardware trigger press before taking the image. This is only available
when using Photo Style (1P).
0T

Takes image immediately (default)

1T

Waits for a trigger press, then takes the image

L - LED State
Determines if the LEDs should be on or off, and when. Ambient illumination (0L) is
preferred for taking pictures of color documents, such as ID cards, especially when
the scanner is in a stand. LED illumination (1L) is preferred when the scanner ishandheld. LED State is not available when using Decoding Style (0P).
0L

LEDs off (default)

1L

LEDs onE - Exposure
Exposure is used in Manual Style only (2P), and allows you to set the exposure
time. This is similar to setting a shutter speed on a camera. The exposure time
determines how long the scanner takes to record an image. On a bright day,exposure times can be very short because plenty of light is available to help record
an image. At nighttime, exposure time can increase dramatically due to the nearabsence of light. Units are 127 microseconds. (Default = 7874)
nE
Example:Range: 1 - 7874

Exposure at 7874E withfluorescent lighting:

Xenon XP User Guide

Exposure at 100E withfluorescent lighting:219

G - Gain
Gain is used in Manual Style only (2P). Like a volume control, the gain modifier
boosts the signal and multiplies the pixel value. As you increase the gain, the noisein an image is also amplified.

Example:1G

No gain (default)

2G

Medium gain

4G

Heavy gain

8G

Maximum gain

Gain at 1G:

Gain at 4G:

Gain at 8G:

W - Target White Value
Sets the target for the median grayscale value in the captured image. For capturingclose-up images of high contrast documents, a lower setting, such as 75, isrecommended. Higher settings result in longer exposure times and brighter
images, but if the setting is too high, the image may be overexposed. Target White
Value is only available when using Photo Style (1P). (Default = 125)nW
Example:Range: 0 - 255

White Value at 75W:

White Value at 125W:

White Value at 200W:

D - Delta for AcceptanceThis sets the allowable range for the white value setting (see W - Target White
Value). Delta is only available when using Photo Style (1P). (Default = 25)
nD

220

Range: 0 - 255

Xenon XP User GuideU - Update Tries
This sets the maximum number of frames the scanner should take to reach the D Delta for Acceptance. Update Tries is only available when using Photo Style (1P).
(Default = 6)nU

Range: 0 - 10

% - Target Set Point Percentage
Sets the target point for the light and dark values in the captured image. A settingof 75% means 75% of the pixels are at or below the target white value, and 25% of
the pixels are above the target white value. Altering this setting from the default is
not recommended under normal circumstances. To alter grayscale values, W Target White Value should be used. (Default = 50)n%
Example:Range: 1 - 99

Target Set Point
Percentage at 97%:

Target Set Point
Percentage at 50%:

Target Set Point
Percentage at 40%:

Step 2 - Ship a Picture Using IMGSHPImage Ship - IMGSHPAn image is taken whenever the trigger is pressed or when the Image Snap
(IMGSNP) command is processed. The last image is always stored in memory. You
can “ship” the image by using the IMGSHP command.
The image ship commands have many different modifiers that can be used tochange the look of the image output. Modifiers affect the image that istransmitted, but do not affect the image in memory. Any number of modifiers may
be appended to the IMGSHP command.
Example: You can use the following command to snap and ship a bitmap image with gamma
correction and document image filtering: IMGSNP;IMGSHP8F75K26U

Xenon XP User Guide

221

IMGSHP Modifiers
A - Infinity Filter
Enhances pictures taken from very long distances (greater than 10 feet or 3m). The
Infinity Filter should not be used with IMGSNP Modifiers (page 218).

Example:0A

Infinity filter off (default)

1A

Infinity filter on

Infinity Filter off (0A)from approximately 12 feet
(3.66m) away:

Infinity Filter on (1A)from approximately 12 feet (3.66m)
away:

C - Compensation
Flattens the image to account for variations in illumination across the image.

Example:0C

Compensation disabled (default)

1C

Compensation enabledCompensation at 0C:

Compensation at 1C:

D - Pixel Depth
Indicates the number of bits per pixel in the transmitted image (KIM or BMP format
only).

222

8D

8 bits per pixel, grayscale image (default)

1D

1 bit per pixel, black and white image

Xenon XP User GuideE - Edge Sharpen
An edge sharpen filter cleans up the edges of an image, making it look cleaner andsharper. While edge sharpening does make the image look cleaner, it also removes
some fine detail from the original image. The strength of the edge sharpen filter
can be entered from 1 to 24. Entering a 23E gives the sharpest edges, but also
increases noise in the image.

Example:0E

Don’t sharpen image (default)

14E

Apply edge sharpen for typical image

neApply edge sharpen using strength n (n = 1-24)

Edge Sharpen at 0E:

Edge Sharpen at 24E:

F - File Format
Indicates the desired format for the image.
0F

KIM format

1F

TIFF binary

2F

TIFF binary group 4, compressed

3F

TIFF grayscale

4F

Uncompressed binary (upper left to lower right, 1 pixel/bit, 0 padded endof line)5F

Uncompressed grayscale (upper left to lower right, bitmap format)

6F

JPEG image (default)

8F

BMP format (lower right to upper left, uncompressed)

15F

BMP Uncompressed raw image

Xenon XP User Guide223

H - Histogram Stretch
Increases the contrast of the transmitted image. Not available with some image
formats.

Example:0H

No stretch (default)

1H

Histogram stretch

Histogram Stretch at 0H:

Histogram Stretch at 1H:

I - Invert Image
Invert image is used to rotate the image around the X or Y axis.

Example:224

1ix

Invert around the X axis (flips picture upside down)

1iy

Invert around the Y axis (flips picture left to right)

Image not inverted:

Image with Invert
Image set to 1ix:

Image with Invert
Image set to 1iy:

Xenon XP User Guide

IF- Noise Reduction
Used to reduce the salt and pepper noise in an image.

Example:0if

No salt and pepper noise reduction (default)

1ifSalt and pepper noise reduction

Noise Reduction Off (0if):

Noise Reduction On (1if):

IR - Image Rotate

Example:0ir

Image as snapped (rightside up) (default)

1ir

Rotate image 90 degrees to the right

2ir

Rotate image 180 degrees (upside down)

3ir

Rotate image 90 degrees to the left

Image Rotate set to 0ir:

Image Rotate set to 2ir:

Image Rotate set to 1ir:

Image Rotate set to 3ir:

Xenon XP User Guide

225

J - JPEG Image Quality
Sets the desired quality when the JPEG image format is selected. Higher numbers
result in higher quality, but larger files. Smaller numbers result in greater amountsof lossy compression, faster transmission times, lower quality, but smaller files.
(Default = 50)
nJ

Image is compressed as much as possible while preserving quality factorof n (n = 0 - 100)0J

worst quality (smallest file)

100J best quality (largest file)K - Gamma Correction
Gamma measures the brightness of midtone values produced by the image. You
can brighten or darken an image using gamma correction. A higher gamma
correction yields an overall brighter image. The lower the setting, the darker theimage. The optimal setting for text images is 50K.

Example:0K

Gamma correction off (default)

50K

Apply gamma correction for brightening typical document image

nK

Apply gamma correction factor n (n = 0-1,000)

Gamma Correction set
to 0K:

Gamma Correction set
to 50K:

Gamma Correction set
to 255K:

L, R, T, B, M - Image Cropping
Ships a window of the image by specifying the left, right, top, and bottom pixel
coordinates. Device columns are numbered 0 through 1279, and device rows arenumbered 0 through 959.

226

nL

The left edge of the shipped image corresponds to column n of the image
in memory. Range: 000 - 843. (Default = 0)nR

The right edge of the shipped image corresponds to column n - 1 of theimage in memory. Range: 000 - 843. (Default = all columns)

nT

The top edge of the shipped image corresponds to row n of the image inmemory. Range: 000 - 639. (Default = 0)

Xenon XP User Guide

nB

Example:The bottom edge of the shipped image corresponds to row n - 1 of theimage in memory. Range: 000 - 639. (Default = all rows)

Uncropped Image:

Image Crop set to
300R:

Image Crop set to 200B:

Image Crop set to
300L:

Image Crop set to 200T:

Alternately, specify the number of pixels to cut from the outside margin of theimage; thus only the center pixels are transmitted.
nM

Example:Margin: cut n columns from the left, n + 1 columns from the right, n rows
from the top, and n + 1 rows from the bottom of the image. Ship theremaining center pixels. Range: 0 - 238.
(Default = 0, or full image)

Image Crop set to 238M:

P - Protocol
Used for shipping an image. Protocol covers two features of the image data being
sent to the host. It addresses the protocol used to send the data (Hmodem, which isan Xmodem 1K variant that has additional header information), and the format of
the image data that is sent.
0P

None (raw data)

2P

None (default for USB)

3P

Hmodem compressed (default for RS232)

4P

Hmodem

S - Pixel Ship
Pixel Ship sizes an image in proportion to its original size. It decimates the image
by shipping only certain, regularly spaced pixels.
Example: 4S would transmit every fourth pixel from every fourth line.

Xenon XP User Guide

227

The smaller number of pixels shipped, the smaller the image, however, after acertain point the image becomes unusable.

Example:1Sship every pixel (default)

2S

ship every 2nd pixel, both horizontally and vertically

3S

ship every 3rd pixel, both horizontally and vertically

Pixel Ship set to 1S:

Pixel Ship
set to 2S:

Pixel Ship
set to 3S:

Pixel Ship
set to 4S:

U - Document Image Filter
Allows you to input parameters to sharpen the edges and smooth the area between
the edges of text in an image. This filter should be used with gamma correction(see page 226), with the scanner in a stand, and the image captured using thecommand:
IMGSNP1P0L168W90%32D
This filter typically provides better JPEG compression than the standard E - Edge
Sharpen command (see page 229). This filter also works well when shipping pure
black and white images (1 bit per pixel). The optimal setting is 26U.

Example:228

0U

Document image filter off (default)

26U

Apply document image filter for typical document imagenU

Apply document image filter using grayscale threshold n. Use lower
numbers when the image contrast is lower. 1U will have a similar effect tosetting E - Edge Sharpen (page 223) to 22e. Range: 0-255.

Document Image Filter set to 0U:

Document Image Filter set to 26U:

Xenon XP User GuideV - Blur Image
Smooths transitions by averaging the pixels next to the hard edges of defined lines
and shaded areas in an image.

Example:0V

Don’t blur (default)

1V

Blur

Blur Image Off (0V):

Blur Image On (1V):

W - Histogram Ship
A histogram gives a quick picture of the tonal range of an image, or key type. A lowkey image has detail concentrated in the shadows; a high-key image has detailconcentrated in the highlights; and an average-key image has detail concentrated
in the midtones. This modifier ships the histogram for an image.

Example:0W

Don’t ship histogram (default)

1W

Ship histogram

Image used for histogram:

Histogram of image:

Image Size Compatibility
If you have applications that expect an image ship to return exactly 640x480
pixels, scan the Force VGA Resolution barcode. Default = Native Resolution.

Force VGA Resolution

Xenon XP User Guide229

* Native Resolution

Intelligent Signature Capture - IMGBOXIMGBOX allows you to configure the size and location of a signature capture area
relative to its proximity to a barcode. This allows you to tailor a signature capturearea to a specific form. In order to use IMGBOX, you need a set form where thesignature box location is in a known location relative to a barcode. You can input
the overall size of the signature area, as well as specify how far the signature area isfrom the barcode, vertically and horizontally. You can also set the resolution andfile format for the final output of the signature capture image.
Note: IMGBOX commands can only be triggered by one of the following types of barcodes:
PDF417, Code 39, Code 128, Aztec, Codabar, and Interleaved 2 of 5. Once one ofthese symbologies has been read, the image is retained for a possible IMGBOX
command.

Signature Capture Optimize
If you will be using your scanner to capture signatures frequently, you should
optimize it for this purpose. However, the speed of scanning barcodes may beslowed when this mode is enabled. Default = Off.

Optimize On* Optimize Off

Below is an example of a signature capture application. In this example, the aimer
is centered over the signature capture area and the trigger is pressed. A single beepis emitted, indicating that the scanner has read a Code 128 barcode and the data
has been transferred to the host. An IMGBOX command may now be sent from thehost to specify the coordinates of the signature capture area below that code, andindicating that only that area containing the signature should be transferred as animage to the host.

230

Xenon XP User GuideTo see this example, align the aimer with the signature area (not with the barcode),then press the trigger.

Send the following IMGBOX command string after the trigger press:
Example: IMGBOX245w37h55y.
Note: Case is not important in the command string. It is used here only for clarity.
The following image is captured:

The IMGBOX commands have many different modifiers that can be used to change
the size and appearance of the signature image output by the scanner. Modifiers
affect the image that is transmitted, but do not affect the image in memory. Any
number of modifiers may be appended to the IMGBOX command.
Note: The IMGBOX command will return a NAK unless a window size (width and height) are
specified. See H - Height of Signature Capture Area (page 233) and W - Width of
Signature Capture Area (page 234).

IMGBOX Modifiers
A - Output Image Width
This option is used to size the image horizontally. If using this option, set theresolution (R) to zero.
Example:Image Width set to 200A:

Image Width set to 600A:

Xenon XP User Guide231

B - Output Image HeightThis option is used to size the image vertically. If using this option, set theresolution (R) to zero.
Example:Image Height set to 50B:

Image Height set to 100B:

D - Pixel DepthThis indicates the number of bits per pixel in the transmitted image, which defines
whether it will be grayscale or black and white.
8D

8 bits per pixel, grayscale image (default)

1D

1 bit per pixel, black and white image

F - File Format
This option indicates the type of file format in which to save the image.

232

0F

KIM format

1F

TIFF binary

2F

TIFF binary group 4, compressed

3F

TIFF grayscale

4F

Uncompressed Binary

5F

Uncompressed grayscale

6F

JPEG image (default)

7F

Outlined image

8F

BMP format

Xenon XP User GuideH - Height of Signature Capture Area
The height of the signature capture area must be measured in inches divided by.01. In the example, the height of the area to be captured is 3/8 inch, resulting in avalue of H = .375/0.01 = 37.5.
Example: IMGBOX245w37h55y.

K - Gamma Correction
Gamma measures the brightness of midtone values produced by the image. You
can brighten or darken an image using gamma correction. A higher gamma
correction yields an overall brighter image. The lower the setting, the darker theimage. The optimal setting for text images is 50K.

Example:0K

Gamma correction off (default)

50K

Apply gamma correction for brightening typical document image

nK

Apply gamma correction factor n (n = 1-255)

Gamma Correction set to 0K:

Gamma Correction set to 50K:

Gamma Correction set to 255K:

R - Resolution of Signature Capture Area
The resolution is the number of pixels that the scanner outputs per each minimum
bar width. The higher the value for R, the higher the quality of the image, but also
the larger the file size. Values begin at 1000. The scanner automatically inserts a

Xenon XP User Guide

233

decimal point between the first and second digit. For example, use 2500 to specify
a resolution of 2.5. Set to zero when using the A and B modifiers (see A - Output
Image Width and B - Output Image Height on page 232).
Example:Resolution set to 0R:

Resolution set to 1000R:

Resolution set to 2000R:

S - Barcode Aspect Ratio
All dimensions used in IMGBOX are measured as multiples of the minimum
element size of the barcode. The barcode aspect ratio allows you to set the ratio of
the barcode height to the narrow element width. In the example, the narrow
element width is .010 inches and the barcode height is 0.400 inches, resulting in avalue of S = 0.4/0.01 = 40.

W - Width of Signature Capture Area
The width of the signature capture area must be measured in inches divided by .01.
In the example, the width of the area to be captured is 2.4 inches, resulting in avalue of W = 2.4/0.01 = 240. (A value of 245 was used in the example toaccommodate a slightly wider image area.)
Example: IMGBOX245w37h55y.

X - Horizontal Barcode Offset
The horizontal barcode offset allows you to offset the horizontal center of thesignature capture area. Positive values move the horizontal center to the right andnegative values to the left. Measurements are in multiples of the minimum bar
width.
Example:Horizontal Offset set to 75X:

Horizontal Offset set to -75X:

234

Xenon XP User GuideY - Vertical Barcode Offset
The vertical barcode offset allows you to offset the vertical center of the signature
capture area. Negative numbers indicate that the signature capture is above thebarcode, and positive numbers indicate that the area is below the barcode.
Measurements are in multiples of the minimum bar width
Example:Vertical Offset set to -7Y:.

Vertical Offset set to 65Y:

RF Default Imaging Device
The scanner supports imaging command processing (IMGSHP, IMGSNP, IMGBOX)
so that EZConfig for Scanning (see page 239) and other applications are able toperform imaging functions as if they were communicating directly with a scanner.
To accomplish this, the scanner uses a menu command called RF_DID (RF Default
Imaging Device). RF_DID is the name of the scanner (BT_NAM) that is to receive
imaging commands. The default for RF_DID is “*”indicating that imaging
commands are to be sent to all associated scanners. Change this setting to
RF_DIDscanner_name to ensure that they are sent to a particular scanner. Refer to"Page" on page 3-54 to generate a report containing the port, work group, scannername, and address for each scanner. Refer to "Scanner Name" on page 3-70 set a
unique name for each scanner.

Xenon XP User Guide

235

236

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER10UTILITIESTo Add a Test Code I.D. Prefix to All Symbologies
This selection allows you to turn on transmission of a Code I.D. before the decoded
symbology. (See the Symbology Charts, beginning on page 297 for the single
character code that identifies each symbology.) This action first clears all current
prefixes, then programs a Code I.D. prefix for all symbologies. This is a temporary
setting that will be removed when the unit is power cycled.

Add Code I.D. Prefix to
All Symbologies (Temporary)Show Software Revision
Scan the barcode below to output the current software revision, unit serial number,and other product information for both the scanner and base.

Show Software Revision

Test Menu
When you scan the Test Menu On code, then scan a programming code in thismanual, the scanner displays the content of a programming code. The
programming function will still occur, but in addition, the content of that
programming code is output to the terminal.
Note: This feature should not be used during normal scanner operation.

Xenon XP User Guide

237

On

* Off

TotalFreedom
TotalFreedom is an open system architecture that makes it possible for you create
applications that reside on your scanner. Decoding apps and Data Formatting
apps can be created using TotalFreedom. For further information about
TotalFreedom, go to our website at www.honeywellaidc.com.

Application Plug-Ins (Apps)
Any apps that you are using can be turned off or on by scanning the following
barcodes. Apps are stored in groups: Decoding, and Formatting. You can enable
and disable these groups of apps by scanning that group’s On or Off barcode
below. You can also scan the List Apps barcode to output a list of all your apps.

* Decoding Apps On

Decoding Apps Off* Formatting Apps On

Formatting Apps Off

List Apps

Note: You must reset your device in order for the apps setting to take effect.

238

Xenon XP User Guide

EZConfig for Scanning Introduction
EZConfig for Scanning provides a wide range of PC-based programming functions
that can be performed on the scanner connected to your PC. EZConfig for
Scanning allows you to download upgrades to the scanner’s firmware, change
programmed parameters, and create and print programming barcodes. Using
EZConfig for Scanning, you can even save/open the programming parameters.
This saved file can be e-mailed or, if required, you can create a single barcode that
contains all the customized programming parameters and mail or fax that barcode
to any location. Users in other locations can scan the barcode to load in thecustomized programming.

Configure with EZConfig for Scanning
Use the EZConfig for Scanning tool to configure your scanner online:
1. Access the Honeywell Technical Support Downloads Portal at https://
hsmftp.honeywell.com.
2. Go to Software > Barcode Scanners > Software > Tools and Utilities >EZConfig for Scanning > Current.

3. Download the Setup version of EZConfig for Scanning.
4. Open EZConfig to configure your scanner.

Xenon XP User Guide

239

Reset the Factory Defaults
Caution: This selection erases all your settings and resets the scanner to theoriginal factory defaults. It also disables all plugins.
If you aren’t sure what programming options are in your scanner, or you’vechanged some options and want to restore the scanner to factory default settings,
first scan the Remove Custom Defaults barcode, then scan Activate Defaults.
This resets the scanner to the factory default settings.

Remove Custom Defaults

Activate Defaults

Note: If using a cordless system, scanning the Activate Defaults barcode also causes boththe scanner and the base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked.
The scanner must be placed in its base to re-establish the link before any setup codes
are entered. If using an Access Point, the linking barcode must be scanned. See
Cordless System Operation beginning on page 41 for additional information.
The Menu Commands, beginning on page 246, list the factory default settings foreach of the commands (indicated by an asterisk (*) on the programming pages).

240

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER11

SERIAL PROGRAMMINGCOMMANDS

The serial programming commands can be used in place of the programming barcodes. Both the serial commands and the programming barcodes will program thescanner. For complete descriptions and examples of each serial programming
command, refer to the corresponding programming barcode in this manual.
The device must be set to an RS232 interface (see page 16). The following commands can be sent via a PC COM port using terminal emulation software.

Conventions
The following conventions are used for menu and query command descriptions:parameter

A label representing the actual value you should send as part of acommand.

[option]An optional part of a command.

{Data}

Alternatives in a command.

bold

Names of menus, menu commands, buttons, dialog boxes, and windows that appear on the screen.

Menu Command Syntax
Menu commands have the following syntax (spaces have been used for clarity
only):
Prefix [:Name:] Tag SubTag {Data} [, SubTag {Data}] [; Tag SubTag {Data}] […] Storage
PrefixThree ASCII characters: SYN M CR (ASCII 22,77,13).

:Name:

This command is only used with cordless devices. It is used to specify
whether you’re communicating with the base or the scanner. To send
information to the scanner (with the base connected to host), use:Xenon: The default factory setting for a Xenon XP scanner is Xenon

Xenon XP User Guide

241

scanner. This setting is changed by using the BT_NAM command,
which accepts alphanumeric values. If the name is not known, a wildcard (*) can be used :*Note: Since the base stores all work group settings and transfers to them to scanner once
they are linked, changes are typically done to the base and not to the scanner.
Tag

A 3 character case-insensitive field that identifies the desired menu
command group. For example, all RS232 configuration settings are
identified with a Tag of 232.

SubTagA 3 character case-insensitive field that identifies the desired menu
command within the tag group. For example, the SubTag for the
RS232 baud rate is BAD.

Data

The new value for a menu setting, identified by the Tag and SubTag.

StorageA single character that specifies the storage table to which the command is applied. An exclamation point (!) performs the command’s
operation on the device’s volatile menu configuration table. A period(.) performs the command’s operation on the device’s non-volatilemenu configuration table. Use the non-volatile table only for semipermanent changes you want saved through a power cycle.

Query Commands
Several special characters can be used to query the device about its settings.

^

What is the default value for the setting(s).

>What is the PAP sub command.

Note: When using the >, all other commands will return NAK.

?

What is the device’s current value for the setting(s).

*What is the range of possible values for the setting(s). (The device’s
response uses a dash (-) to indicate a continuous range of values. A
pipe (|) separates items in a list of non-continuous values.):Name: Field Usage (Optional)
This command returns the query information from the scanner.

Tag Field Usage
When a query is used in place of a Tag field, the query applies to the entire set ofcommands available for the particular storage table indicated by the Storage fieldof the command. In this case, the SubTag and Data fields should not be usedbecause they are ignored by the device.

242

Xenon XP User Guide

SubTag Field Usage
When a query is used in place of a SubTag field, the query applies only to the subset of commands available that match the Tag field. In this case, the Data fieldshould not be used because it is ignored by the device.

Data Field Usage
When a query is used in place of the Data field, the query applies only to the specific command identified by the Tag and SubTag fields.

Concatenation of Multiple Commands
Multiple commands can be issued within one Prefix/Storage sequence. Only theTag, SubTag, and Data fields must be repeated for each command in the sequence.
If additional commands are to be applied to the same Tag, then the new commandsequence is separated with a comma (,) and only the SubTag and Data fields of theadditional command are issued. If the additional command requires a different Tag
field, the command is separated from previous commands by a semicolon (;).

Responses
The device responds to serial commands with one of three responses:
ACK

Indicates a good command which has been processed.

ENQ

Indicates an invalid Tag or SubTag command.

NAK

Indicates the command was good, but the Data field entry was out of
the allowable range for this Tag and SubTag combination, e.g., anentry for a minimum message length of 100 when the field will only
accept 2 characters.

When responding, the device echoes back the command sequence with the statuscharacter inserted directly before each of the punctuation marks (the period, exclamation point, comma, or semicolon) in the command.

Examples of Query Commands
In the following examples, a bracketed notation [ ] depicts a non-displayable
response.
Example: What is the range of possible values for Codabar Coding Enable?
Enter:

cbrena*.

Response:

CBRENA0-1[ACK]Xenon XP User Guide

243

This response indicates that Codabar Coding Enable (CBRENA) has a range of values from 0 to 1 (off and on).
Example: What is the default value for Codabar Coding Enable?
Enter:

cbrena^.

Response:

CBRENA1[ACK]This response indicates that the default setting for Codabar Coding Enable(CBRENA) is 1, or on.
Example: What is the device’s current setting for Codabar Coding Enable?
Enter:

cbrena?.

Response:

CBRENA1[ACK]This response indicates that the device’s Codabar Coding Enable (CBRENA) is set
to 1, or on.
Example: What are the device’s settings for all Codabar selections?
Enter:

cbr?.

Response:

CBRENA1[ACK],
SSX0[ACK],CK20[ACK],
CCT1[ACK],
MIN2[ACK],MAX60[ACK],DFT[ACK].

This response indicates that the device’s Codabar Coding Enable (CBRENA) is set
to 1, or on;
the Start/Stop Character (SSX) is set to 0, or Don’t Transmit;
the Check Character (CK2) is set to 0, or Not Required;concatenation (CCT) is set to 1, or Enabled;
the Minimum Message Length (MIN) is set to 2 characters;
the Maximum Message Length (MAX) is set to 60 characters;
and the Default setting (DFT) has no value.

Trigger Commands
You can activate and deactivate the scanner with serial trigger commands. First,
the scanner must be put in Manual Trigger Mode by scanning a Manual Trigger
Mode barcode (page 89), or by sending a serial menu command for triggering(page 91). Once the scanner is in serial trigger mode, the trigger is activated anddeactivated by sending the following commands:

244

Activate:

SYN T CR

Deactivate:

SYN U CR

Xenon XP User Guide

The scanner scans until a barcode has been read, until the deactivate command issent, or until the serial time-out has been reached (see Read Time-Out on page 91
for a description, and the serial command on page 256).

Reset the Custom Defaults
If you want the custom default settings restored to your scanner, scan the Activate
Custom Defaults barcode below. This resets the scanner to the custom default
settings. If there are no custom defaults, it will reset the scanner to the factory
default settings. Any settings that have not been specified through the custom
defaults will be defaulted to the factory default settings.

Activate Custom Defaults

Note: If using a cordless system, scanning this barcode also causes both the scanner andthe base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked. The scanner must
be placed in its base to re-establish the link. If using an Access Point, the linking
barcode must be scanned. See Cordless System Operation beginning on page 41 foradditional information.
The charts on the following pages list the factory default settings for each of thecommands (indicated by an asterisk (*) on the programming pages).

Xenon XP User Guide

245

Menu Commands
Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Set Custom Defaults

MNUCDP

13

Save Custom Defaults

MNUCDS

13

Reset the Custom Defaults

Activate Custom Defaults

DEFALT

13

Reset the Factory Defaults cordless scanners

Factory Default Settings:
All Application Groups

PAPDFT&

72

Reset the Custom Defaults cordless scanners

Custom Default Settings:
All Application Groups

PAPDFT

73

Keyboard Wedge:
IBM PC AT and Compatibles with
CR suffix

PAP_AT

15

Laptop Direct Connect with CR
suffixPAPLTD16

RS232 Serial PortPAP232

16

IBM Port 5B Interface

PAPP5B

16

IBM Port 9B HHBCR-1 Interface

PAP9B1

16

IBM Port 17 Interface

PAPP17

17

IBM Port 9B HHBCR-2 Interface

PAP9B217

USB IBM SurePos Handheld

PAPSPH17

USB IBM SurePos Tabletop

PAPSPT

17

USB Keyboard (PC)

PAP12418

USB Keyboard (Mac)

PAP12518

USB Japanese Keyboard (PC)

TRMUSB134

18

USB HID

PAP131

18

USB Serial

TRMUSB130

18

CTS/RTS Emulation On

USBCTS1

19*CTS/RTS Emulation Off

USBCTS019

ACK/NAK Mode On

USBACK1

19*ACK/NAK Mode Off

USBACK0

19

Verifone Ruby Terminal

PAPRBY19

Gilbarco Terminal

PAPGLB

20

Honeywell Bioptic Aux PortPAPBIO

20

Datalogic Magellan Aux Port

PAPMAG20

Wincor Nixdorf Terminal

PAPWNX

21

Wincor Nixdorf Beetle

PAPBTL21

Selection
Product Default Settings
Set Custom Defaults

Program the Interface
Plug and Play Codes

Plug and Play Codes:
RS485

Plug and Play Codes: IBM SurePos

Plug and Play Codes: USB

Plug and Play Codes

246

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Program Keyboard
Country

Xenon XP User Guide

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Wincor Nixdorf RS232 Mode A

PAPWMA

22*U.S.A.

KBDCTY0

22

Albania

KBDCTY35

22

Azeri (Cyrillic)

KBDCTY81

22

Azeri (Latin)

KBDCTY80

22

BelarusKBDCTY82

23

Belgium

KBDCTY1

23

BosniaKBDCTY33

23

BrazilKBDCTY16

23

Brazil (MS)KBDCTY59

23

Bulgaria (Cyrillic)

KBDCTY52

23

Bulgaria (Latin)

KBDCTY53

23

Canada (French legacy)

KBDCTY54

23

Canada (French)

KBDCTY18

23

Canada (Multilingual)

KBDCTY55

23

Croatia

KBDCTY32

23

Czech

KBDCTY15

23

Czech (Programmers)

KBDCTY40

24

Czech (QWERTY)KBDCTY39

24

Czech (QWERTZ)KBDCTY38

24

Denmark

KBDCTY8

24

Dutch (Netherlands)

KBDCTY11

24

Estonia

KBDCTY41

24

FaroeseKBDCTY83

24

Finland

KBDCTY2

24

FranceKBDCTY3

24

GaelicKBDCTY84

24

Germany

KBDCTY4

24

Greek

KBDCTY17

24

Greek (220 Latin)

KBDCTY64

25

Greek (220)KBDCTY61

25

Greek (319 Latin)

KBDCTY65

25

Greek (319)KBDCTY62

25

Greek (Latin)

KBDCTY63

25

Greek (MS)KBDCTY66

25

Greek (Polytonic)

KBDCTY60

25

HebrewKBDCTY1225

247

Selection

248

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Hungarian (101 key)

KBDCTY50

25

Hungary

KBDCTY19

25

Iceland

KBDCTY75

25

Irish

KBDCTY73

25

Italian (142)KBDCTY56

26

Italy

KBDCTY5

26

Japan ASCIIKBDCTY28

26

KazakhKBDCTY78

26

Kyrgyz (Cyrillic)

KBDCTY79

26

Latin America

KBDCTY14

26

LatviaKBDCTY42

26

Latvia (QWERTY)KBDCTY43

26

Lithuania

KBDCTY44

26

Lithuania (IBM)KBDCTY45

26

Macedonia

KBDCTY34

26

Malta

KBDCTY74

26

Mongolian (Cyrillic)

KBDCTY86

27

NorwayKBDCTY927

PolandKBDCTY20

27

Polish (214)KBDCTY57

27

Polish (Programmers)

KBDCTY58

27

Portugal

KBDCTY13

27

Romania

KBDCTY25

27

RussiaKBDCTY26

27

Russian (MS)KBDCTY67

27

Russian (Typewriter)

KBDCTY6827SCS

KBDCTY21

27

Serbia (Cyrillic)

KBDCTY37

27

Serbia (Latin)

KBDCTY36

28

Slovakia

KBDCTY22

28

Slovakia (QWERTY)KBDCTY49

28

Slovakia (QWERTZ)KBDCTY48

28

Slovenia

KBDCTY31

28

Spain

KBDCTY10

28

Spanish variation

KBDCTY51

28

SwedenKBDCTY23

28

Switzerland (French)

KBDCTY29

28

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

ALT Mode

Keyboard Style

Keyboard Conversion

Control Character Output

Xenon XP User Guide

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Switzerland (German)

KBDCTY628

Tatar

KBDCTY85

28

Turkey F

KBDCTY27

28

Turkey Q

KBDCTY24

29

Ukrainian

KBDCTY76

29

United Kingdom

KBDCTY7

29

United Stated (Dvorak right)

KBDCTY89

29

United States (Dvorak left)

KBDCTY88

29

United States (Dvorak)KBDCTY87

29

United States (International)

KBDCTY30

29

Uzbek (Cyrillic)

KBDCTY77

29

* Off

KBDALT030

3 Characters

KBDALT630

4 Characters

KBDALT7

30*Regular

KBDSTY030

Caps Lock

KBDSTY1

30

Shift Lock

KBDSTY2

30

Automatic Caps Lock

KBDSTY6

31

Autocaps via Num Lock

KBDSTY7

31

Emulate External
Keyboard

KBDSTY5

31*Keyboard Conversion Off

KBDCNV031

Convert all Characters to UpperCase

KBDCNV1

32

Convert all Characters to Lower
Case

KBDCNV2

32*Control Character Output Off

KBDNPE032

Control Character Output On

KBDNPE1

32

249

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Keyboard Modifiers*Control + X OffKBDCAS033

DOS Mode Control + X

KBDCAS1

33

Windows Mode Control + X

KBDCAS2

33

Windows Mode Prefix/Suffix Off

KBDCAS3

33

DOS Mode Control + X Mode Onwith Windows Mode Prefix/Suffix

KBDCAS4

33

Supports ALT 3 Digit HEX ModeKBDCAS5

33*Turbo Mode Off

KBDTMD0

33

Turbo Mode On

KBDTMD1

33*Numeric Keypad Off

KBDNPS033

Numeric Keypad On

KBDNPS1

33*Auto Direct Connect Off

KBDADC034

Auto Direct Connect On

KBDADC134300 BPS

232BAD034

600 BPS

232BAD1

34

1200 BPS

232BAD234

2400 BPS

232BAD3344800 BPS

232BAD4349600 BPS

232BAD5

35

19200 BPS

232BAD63538400 BPS

232BAD73557600 BPS

232BAD835*115200 BPS

232BAD935

7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Even

232WRD335

7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity None

232WRD035

7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Odd

232WRD635

7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Even

232WRD435

7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity None

232WRD1

35

7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Odd

232WRD736

8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Even

232WRD536*8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity None

232WRD2

36

8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Odd

232WRD836

8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Mark232WRD1436

Range 0 - 300 seconds*0232LPT###

36

Baud Rate

Word Length: Data Bits, Stop Bits,
and Parity

RS232 Receiver Time-out

250

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

RS232 Handshaking*RTS/CTS Off

232CTS037

Flow Control, No Timeout

232CTS1

37

Two-Direction Flow Control

232CTS2

37

Flow Control with Timeout

232CTS337

RS232 Timeout (1-5100
milliseconds)

232DEL####37*XON/XOFF Off

232XON038

XON/XOFF On

232XON137*ACK/NAK Off

232ACK038

ACK/NAK On

232ACK1

38*Packet Mode Off

232PKT0

38

Packet Mode On

232PKT2

38*Bioptic ACK/NAK Off

232NAK0

39

Bioptic ACK/NAK On

232NAK1

39

ACK/NAK Timeout (1-30000
milliseconds) *5100

232DLK#####

39

Replace a Linked Scanner

Override locked Scanner (Single
Scanner)

BT_RPL1

42

Temporary Streaming Presentation
Mode*Temporary Streaming
Presentation Mode On

BEPPGE246*10 Second Timeout

TRGTPM1000046

30 Second Timeout

TRGTPM30000

46*Disabled

BT_PIB0

46

Enabled

BT_PIB1

46*On:*:BASRED1

50

Off

:*:BASRED050*Low Power Alert 10-30%

LPIRAG0

51

Low Power Alert 10-50%

LPIRAG1

51

Low Power Alert Flash Number (19) *3

LPIFNO#

51

Interval Between Flashes (1-9) *2

LPIFDL#52

Low Power Alert Repeat (1-5) *1

LPI_NO#

52

Interval Between Alerts (10-120)*10

LPI_DL###52

Low Power Alert Beep Off

LPIBEP0

52*Low Power Alert Beep On

LPIBEP1

53

Reset Scanner

RESET_

53

Scanner-Bioptic Packet Mode

Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Mode

Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Timeout

Cordless System Operation

Presentation Mode in Base

Base Power Communication
Indicator
Low Power Alerts

Reset Scanner

Xenon XP User Guide

251

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Scan in Cradle Off (CCB-H-010BT
default)

BT_SIC053

Scan in Cradle On (CCB01-010BT
default)

BT_SIC1

53

Shut Down Scanner in Cradle

BT_SIC2

53

Base Charge Off

BTRCHG0

54*External or Interface Cable Power

BTRCHG1

54

External Power Only

BTRCHG2

54*On

BEPPGE1

54

Off

BEPPGE0

54*Low (1000 Hz)

BEPPFQ1000

55

Medium (3250 Hz)

BEPPFQ3250

55High (4200 Hz)

BEPPFQ4200

55*Low/Razz (250 Hz) (min 200 Hz)

BASFQ2250

55

Medium (3250 Hz)

BASFQ23250

55

High (4200 Hz) (max 9000 Hz)

BASFQ24200

55

Number of Beeps - Base Error*1 (Range 1 - 9)

BASERR#

56

Scanner Report

Scanner Report

RPTSCN56

Scanner Address

Scanner Address

BT_LDA

56

Base Address

Base Address

BASLDA

56

Scanner Modes

Charge Only Mode

BASLNK0

57*Charge and Link Mode

BASLNK1

57

Locked Link Mode

BASCON0,DNG1

58*Open Link Mode

BASCON1,DNG1

58

Unlink Scanner

BT_RMV

58

Override Locked Scanner

BT_RPL1

59

Base Alarm Duration (Range 1 3000 sec) *0

BASORD####59

Scanner Alarm Duration (Range 1- 3000 sec) *0

BT_ORD####

59

Base Alarm Type (0-7) *0

BASORW#60

Scanner Alarm Type (0-7) *0

BT_ORW#60

0 Seconds

BT_LPT0

61

200 Seconds

BT_LPT200

61

400 Seconds

BT_LPT400

61

900 Seconds

BT_LPT900

61*3600 Seconds

BT_LPT3600

61

7200 Seconds

BT_LPT7200

61

Selection
Scan While in Base Cradle

Base Charge Modes

Page Mode

Page Pitch

Beeper Pitch - Base Error

Out-of-Range Alarm

Alarm Sound Type

Scanner Power Time-Out Timer

252

Setting* Indicates default

Xenon XP User Guide

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

*Full Power (100%)

BT_TXP100

62

Medium Power (35%)

BT_TXP35

62

Medium Low Power (5%)

BT_TXP5

62

Low Power (1%)

BT_TXP1

62*Full Power (100%)

BT_TXP8

63

Medium High Power (87%)

BT_TXP7

63

Medium Power (50%)

BT_TXP4

63

Low Power (1%)

BT_TXP1

63

Automatic Batch Mode

BATENA1

64*Batch Mode Off

BATENA064

Inventory Batch Mode

BATENA2

64

Persistent Batch Mode

BATENA3

64

Off

BATBEP064*On

BATBEP1

64*Flash Storage

BATNVS1

65

RAM Storage

BATNVS065*OffBATQTY065

On

BATQTY1

65

0

BATNUM066*1

BATNUM1

66

2

BATNUM2

66

3

BATNUM366

4

BATNUM467

5

BATNUM567

6

BATNUM6

67

7

BATNUM767

8

BATNUM867

9

BATNUM967*FIFO

BATLIF067

LIFO

BATLIF1

67

Total Records

Total Records

BATNRC

68

Delete Last Code

Delete Last Code

BATUND

68

Clear All Codes

Clear All Codes

BATCLR

68

Transmit Records to Host

Transmit Inventory Records

BAT_TX

68

Selection
Flexible Power Management for
Xenon XP 1952g/1952hFlexible Power Management for
Xenon XP 1952g-BF/1952h-BF

Batch Mode

Batch Mode Beep

Batch Mode Storage

Batch Mode Quantity

Quantity Codes

Batch Mode Output Order

Xenon XP User Guide

253

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Batch Mode Transmit Delay*Off (No Delay)BATDLY0

69

Short (250 ms)

BATDLY250

69

Medium (500 ms)

BATDLY500

69

Long (1000 ms)

BATDLY1000

69

Multiple Scanner
Operation

Multiple Scanner Operation

BASCON2,DNG3

69

Scanner Name

0001

BT_NAM0001

70

0002

BT_NAM0002

70

0003

BT_NAM0003

70

0004

BT_NAM0004

70

0005

BT_NAM0005

70

0006

BT_NAM0006

70

0007

BT_NAM0007

70

Reset

RESET_

71

Scanner Name

BT_NAM

71*Group 0

GRPSEL072

Group 1GRPSEL1

72

Group 2GRPSEL2

72

Group 3

GRPSEL372

Group 4

GRPSEL472

Group 5GRPSEL572

Group 6GRPSEL6

72

Reset the Factory Defaults: All
Application Work Groups

Factory Default Settings:
All Work Groups

PAPDFT&

72

Reset the Custom Defaults: All
Application Work Groups

Custom Default Settings:
All Work Groups

PAPDFT

73

Bluetooth Connection*Bluetooth SSP On

BT_SSP1

73

Bluetooth SSP Off

BT_SSP073

Bluetooth HID Keyboard Connect

PAPBTH74

Bluetooth HID Japanese Keyboard
Connect

PAPJKB

74

Bluetooth HID Keyboard
Disconnect

PAPSPP76

Pair with Bluetooth Low Energy(BLE) Devices

HID BLE Connect

PAPLEH76

Serial BLE Connect

PAPTIO76

Bluetooth Serial Port - PCs/
Laptops

Non-Base BT Connection

BT_TRM0;BT_DNG576

PDA’s/Mobility Systems Devices

BT Connection - PDA/Mobility
Systems Device

BT_TRM0;BT_DNG1

76

Application Work Group
Selections

254

Xenon XP User Guide

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Change the Scanner’s Bluetooth
PIN CodeBluetooth PIN Code

BT_PIN

77

Auto Reconnect Mode

*Auto Reconnect On

BT_ACM1

77

Auto Reconnect Off

BT_ACM077

Maximum Link Attempts

Maximum Link Attempts (0-100)*0

BT_MLA###

78

Relink Time-Out

Relink Time-Out (1-100) *3

BT_RLT###

79

Host Command Acknowledgment

Host ACK On

HSTACK1

81*Host ACK Off

HSTACK081

Host ACK Timeout (1-90) *10

HSTATO##82

Power Up Beeper Off - Scanner

BEPPWR083*Power Up Beeper On - Scanner

BEPPWR1

83

Power Up Beeper Off - Cordless
Base

BASPWR083

Power Up Beeper On - Cordless
Base

BASPWR1

83

Beep on BEL On

BELBEP1

84*Beep on BEL Off

BELBEP084

On

BEPTRG1

84*Off

BEPTRG084

Off

BEPBEP084*On

BEPBEP1

84

OffBEPLVL084*Low (Default-Xenon XP
healthcare)

BEPLVL1

85

MediumBEPLVL285*High (Default - Xenon XP)

BEPLVL3

85

Low (1600 Hz) (min 400 Hz)

BEPFQ11600

85*Medium (2700 Hz)

BEPFQ12700

85

High (4200 Hz) (max 9000 Hz)

BEPFQ14200

85*Vibrate - Good Read Off

TFBGRD086

Vibrate - Good Read On

TFBGRD1

86

Vibrate Duration

Duration(100 - 2,000 ms) *100

TFBDUR####

86

Beeper Pitch - Error (Frequency)*Razz (250 Hz) (min 200 Hz)

BEPFQ2800

86

Medium (3250 Hz)

BEPFQ23250

86

High (4200 Hz) (max 9000 Hz)

BEPFQ24200

86

Selection

Input/Output Selections
Power Up Beeper

Beep on BEL Character

Trigger Click

Beeper - Good Read

Beeper Volume - Good Read

Beeper Pitch - Good Read
(Frequency)

Vibrate - Good Read

Xenon XP User Guide

255

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Beeper Duration - Good Read

*Normal Beep

BEPBIP087

Short Beep

BEPBIP1

87

Off

BEPLED087*On

BEPLED1

87

Number of Beeps - Good Read

(Range 1 - 9) *1

BEPRPT#

87

Number of Beeps - Error(Range 1 - 9) *1

BEPERR#

87

Good Read Delay*No DelayDLYGRD0

88

Short Delay (500 ms)

DLYGRD500

88

Medium Delay (1000 ms)

DLYGRD1000

88

Long Delay (1500 ms)

DLYGRD1500

88

User-Specified Good Read Delay

Range 0 - 30,000 ms

DLYGRD#####

88

Trigger Modes*Manual Trigger - Normal

PAPHHF89

Manual Trigger - Enhanced

PAPHHS

89*Trigger Toggle Off

TRGTGM089

Trigger Toggle - Image Capture

TRGTGM1

89

Trigger Toggle Off - Centering

TRGTGM389

2 Quick Triggers

TRGTPC290

3 Quick Triggers

TRGTPC390

4 Quick Triggers

TRGTPC490

Trigger Timing

Trigger Timing (Range 50 - 2000)*400

TRGTTI####

90

Trigger Toggle Timeout

Trigger Toggle Timeout (Range 0 65) *5

TRGTGT##

90

Serial Trigger Mode

Read Time-Out(0 - 300,000 ms) *30,000

TRGSTO####

91

Presentation Mode

Presentation Mode

PAPTPR

91

Triggered Presentation Mode

Ambient Light Only

PDCLED0

92*Ambient and Scanner Light

PDCLED1

92

Presentation LED Behavior After
Decode*LEDs On

TRGPCK1

92

LEDs OffTRGPCK0

92

Presentation Centering Window

Presentation Centering On

PDCWIN1

93*Presentation Centering OffPDCWIN093

Left of Presentation Centering
Window (*40%)

PDCLFT###

94

Right of Presentation Centering
Window (*60%)

PDCRGT###94

Top of Presentation Centering
Window (*40%)

PDCTOP###

93

Bottom of Presentation Centering
Window (*60%)

PDCBOT###93

LED - Good Read

Trigger Toggle

Trigger Number

256

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

In-Stand Sensor Mode

*Sensor On

TRGSSW1

94

Sensor Off

TRGSSW0

94

Poor Quality 1D Reading On

DECLDI1

94*Poor Quality 1D Reading Off

DECLDI095*Poor Quality PDF Reading On

PDFXPR10

94

Poor Quality PDF Reading OffPDFXPR095

Low Resolution PDF Codes On

PDFDMI1

95*Low Resolution PDF Codes Off

PDFDMI095*CodeGate Off Out-of-Stand

AOSCGD0.

96

CodeGate On Out-of-Stand

AOSCGD1.

96

Streaming Presentation Mode Normal

PAPSPN96

Streaming Presentation Mode Enhanced

PAPSPE96

Hands Free Time-Out

Range (0 - 300,000 ms) 5000 ms

TRGPTO######

97

Reread Delay

Short (500 ms)

DLYRRD500

97*Medium (750 ms)

DLYRRD750

97

Long (1000 ms)

DLYRRD1000

97

Extra Long (2000 ms)

DLYRRD2000

97

User-Specified

Range 0 - 30,000 ms

DLYRRD#####

98

2D Reread Delay*2D Reread Delay Off

DLY2RR098

Short (1000ms)

DLY2RR1000

98

Medium (2000ms)

DLY2RR2000

98

Long (3000ms)

DLY2RR3000

98

Extra Long (4000ms)

DLY2RR4000

98

*Off

HSTCEN099

On

HSTCEN1

99

Activation Character (Range 0255) *12 [DC2]

HSTACH###99

Do Not End Character Activation
After Good Read

HSTCGD0

99

End Character Activation After
Good Read

HSTCGD1

100

Character Activation Timeout(Range 1 - 300,000) *30,000 ms

HSTCDT######

100

*Off

HSTDEN0100

On

HSTDEN1

100

Deactivation Character (Range 0255) *14 [DC4]

HSTDCH###100

Poor Quality Codes

CodeGate

Streaming Presentation

Character Activation Mode

Character Deactivation Mode

Xenon XP User Guide

257

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Illumination Lights*Lights On

SCNLED1

101

Lights Off

SCNLED0101

1 millisecond

SCNDLY1

101

250 milliseconds

SCNDLY250

101

500 milliseconds

SCNDLY500

101*Off (no delay)SCNDLY0101

User-Specified Aimer Delay

Range 0 - 4,000 ms

SCNDLY####

102

Aimer ModeOffSCNAIM0102*Interlaced

SCNAIM2

102

Single Code Centering

Single Code Centering

DECWIN1;DECTOP49;DECBOT
51;DECRGT51;DECLFT49

103

Centering Window

Centering On

DECWIN1

104*Centering Off

DECWIN0

104

Left of Centering Window (*40%)

DECLFT###

104

Right of Centering Window (*60%)

DECRGT###104

Top of Centering Window (*40%)

DECTOP###

104

Bottom of Centering Window(*60%)

DECBOT###

104

On

PRFENA1

105*OffPRFENA0105

High Priority Symbology

PRFCOD##105

Low Priority Symbology

PRFBLK##

105

Preferred Symbology Timeout(Range 100-3000) *500

PRFPTO####

106

Preferred Symbology Default

PRFDFT

106

Enter Output Sequence

SEQBLK107

Add Prefix to Complete Output
Sequences

SEQPRE107

Add Suffix to Complete Output
Sequences

SEQSUF107

Add Separators to Complete
Output Sequences

SEQSEP

107

Terminate String

FF

107

Transmit Partial Output Sequence

SEQTTS1

107

Add Prefix to Partial Output
Sequences

SEQIPR107

Add Suffix to Partial Output
Sequences

SEQISU107

Add Separators to Partial Output
Sequences

SEQISE

107

Aimer Delay

Preferred Symbology

Output Sequence Editor

Partial Sequence258

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Require Output SequenceGood Read Tone - Output
Sequences

Multiple Symbols

No ReadVideo Reverse

Working Orientation

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Terminate String

FF

107

Define Satisfactory Subsets

SEQSAT

107

Timeout for SEQSATSEQTIM

107*Discard Partial Output Sequence

SEQTTS0

112

Default Output Sequence

SEQDFT

113

Required

SEQ_EN2

114

On/Not Required

SEQ_EN1

114*Off

SEQ_EN0114

Good Read Beep - Each Code in
Sequence

BEPSIN0114*Good Read Click - Each Code in
Sequence

BEPSIN1

114

Good Read Beep - Partial
Sequence Output

BEPISE0114*Error Tone - Partial Sequence
OutputBEPISE1

115

On

SHOTGN1

114*OffSHOTGN0114

On

SHWNRD1115*OffSHWNRD0

115

Video Reverse Only

VIDREV1

116

Video Reverse and Standard
BarcodesVIDREV2

116*Video Reverse Off

VIDREV0

116*Upright

ROTATN0

117

Vertical, Bottom to Top (Rotate
CCW 90°)ROTATN1

117

Upside Down

ROTATN2

117

Vertical, Top to Bottom (Rotate CW
90°)

ROTATN3

117

Silent Mode with Flashing LED Cordless Scanner and Basebeplfn5;beplfr50;beppar0;basp
wr0;beppwr0;baslvl0;beplvl0;bepbip0;bepFQ12700;beplot0.

119

Silent Mode with Flashing LED Corded Scanner

beplfn5;beplfr50;beppwr0;beplv
l0;bepbip0;bepFQ12700;beplot
0.

119

Silent Mode with Long LED Cordless Scanner and Basebeplfn0;beplfr10;beppar0;basp
wr0;beppwr0;baslvl0;beplvl0;bepbip0;bepFQ12700;beplot1.

120

Healthcare Selections
Quiet Operations - Combination
Codes

Xenon XP User Guide

259

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Silent Mode with Long LED Corded Scanner

beplfn0;beplfr10;beppwr0;beplv
l0;bepbip0;bepFQ12700;beplot
1.

120

Very Low Beeper (NighttimeMode) - Cordless Scanner andBasebeplfn0;beplfr10;beppar0;basp
wr0;beppwr1;baslvl1;beplvl1;be
pbip1;bepFQ14200;beplot0.

120

Very Low Beeper (NighttimeMode) - Corded Scanner

beplfn0;beplfr10;beppwr1;beplv
l1;bepbip1;bepFQ14200;beplot
0.

120

Low Beeper (Daytime Mode) Cordless Scanner and Basebeplfn0;beplfr10;beppar1;basp
wr1;beppwr1;baslvl1;beplvl1;bepbip0;bepFQ12700;beplot0.

121

Low Beeper (Daytime Mode) Corded Scanner

beplfn0;beplfr10;beppwr1;beplv
l1;bepbip0;bepFQ12700;beplot
0.

121*Green LED Flashes/Sound

BEPPAR1

121

Red LED Flashes/Silent

BEPPAR0121*1 LED FlashBEPLFN0122

5 LED Flashes

BEPLFN5122

10 LED Flashes

BEPLFN10122

25 LED Flashes

BEPLFN25

122*Fast FlashBEPLFR50

122

Medium FlashBEPLFR250

122

Slow FlashBEPLFR500

122*LED Solid Off (Resume Flash)

BEPLOT0123

LED Solid 1 Second

BEPLOT1

123

LED Solid 3 Seconds

BEPLOT3

123

LED Solid 5 Seconds

BEPLOT5

123

Page Volume Off

BEPPGV0

123*Page Volume Low

BEPPGV1

123

Page Volume Medium

BEPPGV2

124

Page Volume HighBEPPGV3

124

Base Alarm Volume Off

BASORV0124

Scanner Alarm Volume Off

BT_ORV0

124*Base Alarm Volume Low

BASORV1

124*Scanner Alarm Volume Low

BT_ORV1

124

Base Alarm Volume Medium

BASORV2

124

Scanner Alarm Volume Medium

BT_ORV2

125

Base Alarm Volume HighBASORV3

125

Quiet Operations - LED and Volume Settings
Linking LED Colors andSound

Number of LED Flashes

LED Flash Rate

LED Solid (No Flash)Page Volume Control

Out-of-Range Alarm Volume

260

Xenon XP User Guide

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Scanner Alarm Volume HighBT_ORV3

125

Out-of-Range Delay (Range 03000) *0

BT_ORY####125

VSUFCR129

Add Prefix

PREBK2##

129

Clear One Prefix

PRECL2

129

Clear All Prefixes

PRECA2129

Add Suffix

SUFBK2##

129

Clear One Suffix

SUFCL2

129

Clear All Suffixes

SUFCA2

129*EnableRMVFNC0130

DisableRMVFNC1130Intercharacter Delay

Range 0 - 5000 (5ms increments)

DLYCHR####

130

User Specified
Intercharacter Delay

Delay Length
0 - 5000 (5ms increments)

DLYCRX####131

Character to Trigger Delay

DLY_XX##

131

Interfunction Delay

Range 0 - 5000 (5ms increments)

DLYFNC####

131

Intermessage Delay

Range 0 - 5000 (5ms increments)

DLYMSG####

132*Default Data Format (None)DFMDF3

134

Show Data Format SettingsDFMBK3?

134

Enter Data Format

DFMBK3##135

Clear One Data Format

DFMCL3135

Clear All Data Formats

DFMCA3

135

Data Formatter Off

DFM_EN0149*Data Formatter On,
Not Required,
Keep Prefix/Suffix

DFM_EN1150

Data Format Required,
Keep Prefix/Suffix

DFM_EN2150

Data Formatter On,
Not Required,
Drop Prefix/Suffix

DFM_EN3150

Data Format Required,
Drop Prefix/Suffix

DFM_EN4150*Data Format Non-Match Error
Tone OnDFMDEC0150

Data Format Non-Match Error
Tone OffDFMDEC1

151

Selection

Out-of-Range Delay

Prefix/Suffix Selections
Add CR Suffix to All Symbologies
PrefixSuffixFunction Code Transmit

Data Formatter Selections
Data Format Editor

Data Formatter

Data Format Non-Match Error Tone

Xenon XP User Guide

261

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Primary/Alternate Data Formats

Primary Data Format

ALTFNM0151

Data Format 1

ALTFNM1

151

Data Format 2

ALTFNM2

151

Data Format 3

ALTFNM3

151

Single Scan-Primary
Data Format

VSAF_0151

Single Scan-Data Format 1

VSAF_1

152

Single Scan-Data Format 2

VSAF_2152

Single Scan-Data Format 3

VSAF_3152

All Symbologies

All Symbologies Off

ALLENA0154

Codabar

Default All Codabar
Settings

CBRDFT

154

Off

CBRENA0154*On

CBRENA1

154*Don’t Transmit

CBRSSX0

155

Transmit

CBRSSX1

155*No Check Char.

CBRCK20

155

Validate, But Don’t Transmit

CBRCK21

155

Validate, and Transmit

CBRCK22155*Off

CBRCCT0

156

On

CBRCCT1

156

Require

CBRCCT2

156

Minimum (2 - 60) *4

CBRMIN##156

Maximum (2 - 60) *60

CBRMAX##

156

Default All Code 39
Settings

C39DFT

157

Off

C39ENA0

157*On

C39ENA1

157*Don’t Transmit

C39SSX0

157

Transmit

C39SSX1

157*No Check Char.

C39CK20

157

Validate, But Don’t
Transmit

C39CK21

157

Validate,and Transmit

C39CK22

157

Minimum (0 - 48) *0

C39MIN##158

Maximum (0 - 48) *48

C39MAX##

158

Single Scan Data Format Change

Symbologies

Codabar Start/Stop Char.

Codabar Check Char.

Codabar Concatenation

Codabar Message Length

Code 39

Code 39 Start/Stop Char.

Code 39 Check Char.

Code 39 Message Length262

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Code 39 Append*Off

C39APP0158

On

C39APP1

158*OffC39B320

159On

C39B321

159*Off

C39ASC0159

On

C39ASC1

159

Code 39 Code Page

C39DCP

159

Default All Interleaved
2 of 5 Settings

I25DFT

160

Off

I25ENA0160*On

I25ENA1

160*No Check Digit

I25CK20160

Validate, But Don’t
Transmit

I25CK21160

Validate and Transmit

I25CK22

160

Minimum (2 - 80) *4

I25MIN##161

Maximum (2 - 80) *80

I25MAX##161*FEBRABAN Decode Off

I25PAY0161

FEBRABAN Decode On

I25PAY1

161

Default All NEC
2 of 5 Settings

N25DFT

162

Off

N25ENA0162*On

N25ENA1

162*No Check Digit

N25CK20

162

Validate, But Don’t
Transmit

N25CK21

162

Validate and Transmit

N25CK22

162

Minimum (2 - 80) *4

N25MIN##163

Maximum (2 - 80) *80

N25MAX##

163

Default All Code 93
Settings

C93DFT

163

Off

C93ENA0163*On

C93ENA1

163

Minimum (0 - 80) *0

C93MIN##163

Maximum (0 - 80) *80

C93MAX##

163

On

C93APP1

164*Off

C93APP0164

Code 93 Code Page

C93DCP

164

Code 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF)

Code 39 Full ASCIIInterleaved 2 of 5

Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit

Interleaved 2 of 5 Message Length

NEC 2 of 5

NEC 2 of 5 Check Digit

NEC 2 of 5 Message Length

Code 93

Code 93 Message Length

Code 93 Append

Code 93 Code Page

Xenon XP User Guide

263

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Default All Straight 2 of 5
Industrial Settings

R25DFT

165*Off

R25ENA0165

On

R25ENA1

165

Straight 2 of 5 Industrial Message
LengthMinimum (1 - 48) *4

R25MIN##165

Maximum (1 - 48) *48

R25MAX##

165

Straight 2 of 5 IATA

Default All Straight 2 of 5 IATA
Settings

A25DFT

166

Straight 2 of 5 IATA

*Off

A25ENA0

166

On

A25ENA1

166

Straight 2 of 5 IATA Redundancy

Range (0 - 10) *0

A25VOT##

166

Straight 2 of 5 IATA Message
LengthMinimum (1 - 48) *4

A25MIN##

166

Maximum (1 - 48) *48

A25MAX##

166

Matrix 2 of 5

Default All Matrix 2 of 5
Settings

X25DFT

167*Off

X25ENA0167

On

X25ENA1

167

Minimum (1 - 80) *4

X25MIN##167

Maximum (1 - 80) *80

X25MAX##

167

Default All Code 11
Settings

C11DFT

168*Off

C11ENA0168

On

C11ENA1168

1 Check Digit

C11CK20168*2 Check Digits

C11CK21

168

Minimum (1 - 80) *4

C11MIN##168

Maximum (1 - 80) *80

C11MAX##

168

Default All Code 128
Settings

128DFT

169

Off128ENA0169*On

128ENA1169*Off

ISBENA0169

On

ISBENA1

169

Code 128 Redundancy

Range (0 - 10) *0

128VOT##169

Code 128 Message Length

Minimum (0 - 80) *0

128MIN##170

Maximum (0 - 80) *80

128MAX##

170

On

128APP1170*Off128APP0170

Code 128 Code Page (*2)

128DCP##

170

Selection
Straight 2 of 5 Industrial

Matrix 2 of 5 Message Length

Code 11

Code 11 Check Digits Required

Code 11 Message Length

Code 128

ISBT Concatenation

Code 128 Append

Code 128 Code Page

264

Setting* Indicates default

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

GS1-128

Default All GS1-128 Settings

GS1DFT

171*On

GS1ENA1

171

Off

GS1ENA0171

Minimum (1 - 80) *1

GS1MIN##

171

Maximum (0 - 80) *80

GS1MAX##

171

Default All Telepen
Settings

TELDFT

172*Off

TELENA0172

On

TELENA1

172*AIM Telepen Output

TELOLD0172

Original Telepen Output

TELOLD1

172

Minimum (1 - 60) *1

TELMIN##172

Maximum (1 - 60) *60

TELMAX##

172

Default All
UPC-A Settings

UPADFT173

Off

UPBENA0173*On

UPBENA1

173

Off

UPACKX0173*On

UPACKX1

173

Off

UPANSX0174*On

UPANSX1174*Off

UPAAD20174

On

UPAAD21174*Off

UPAAD50

174

On

UPAAD51

174*Not Required

UPAARQ0174

Required

UPAARQ1

174

Addenda Timeout

Range (0 - 120) *500

DLYADD#####

175

UPC-A Addenda
Separator

Off

UPAADS0175*On

UPAADS1175

UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended
Coupon Code*Off

CPNENA0175

Allow Concatenation

CPNENA1

175

Require Concatenation

CPNENA2

175

Addenda Timeout

Range (0 - 120) *500

DLYADD#####

176

Coupon GS1 DataBar Output*GS1 Output Off

CPNGS10176

GS1 Output On

CPNGS11176

GS1-128 Message Length

Telepen

Telepen Output

Telepen Message Length

UPC-A

UPC-A Check Digit

UPC-A Number System

UPC-A 2 Digit Addenda

UPC-A 5 Digit Addenda

UPC-A Addenda Required

Xenon XP User Guide

265

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Default All UPC-E
Settings

UPEDFT177

Off

UPEEN00

177*On

UPEEN01177*Off

UPEEXP0177

On

UPEEXP1

177

Required

UPEARQ1

177*Not Required

UPEARQ0177

Addenda Timeout

Range (0 - 120) *500

DLYADD#####

178

UPC-E0 Addenda Separator*On

UPEADS1178

Off

UPEADS0178OffUPECKX0178*On

UPECKX1178OffUPENSX0179*On

UPENSX1

179

2 Digit Addenda On

UPEAD21179*2 Digit Addenda Off

UPEAD20179

5 Digit Addenda On

UPEAD51179*5 Digit Addenda Off

UPEAD50179*Off

UPEEN10179On

UPEEN11

179

Default All EAN/
JAN Settings

E13DFT

180

Off

E13ENA0180*On

E13ENA1180

UPC-A Converted to EAN-13

UPAENA0180*Do not Convert UPC-A

UPAENA1180

Off

E13CKX0181*On

E13CKX1

181

2 Digit Addenda On

E13AD21181*2 Digit Addenda Off

E13AD20181

5 Digit Addenda On

E13AD51

181*5 Digit Addenda Off

E13AD50

181*Not Required

E13ARQ0181

Required

E13ARQ1

181*Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ2900

182

Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ2901

182

Selection
UPC-E0UPC-E0 Expand

UPC-E0 Addenda Required

UPC-E0 Check Digit

UPC-E0 Leading Zero

UPC-E0 Addenda

UPC-E1

EAN/JAN-13

Convert UPC-A to EAN-13

EAN/JAN-13 Check Digit

EAN/JAN-13 Addenda

EAN/JAN-13 Addenda Required

EAN-13 Beginning with 290
Addenda Required

266

Setting* Indicates default

Xenon XP User Guide

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

*Don’t Require Addenda

ARQ3780

182

Require 2 Digit Addenda

ARQ3781

182

Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ3782

182

Require 2 or 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ3783

182*Don’t Require Addenda

ARQ4140

183

Require 2 Digit Addenda

ARQ4141

183

Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ4142183

Require 2 or 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ4143

183*Don’t Require Addenda

ARQ4340

184

Require 2 Digit Addenda

ARQ4341

184

Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ4342

184

Require 2 or 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ4343

184*Don’t Require 2 Digit Addenda

ARQ9770

184

Require 2 Digit Addenda

ARQ9771

184*Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ9780

185

Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ9781

185*Don’t Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ9790

185

Require 5 Digit Addenda

ARQ9791

185

Addenda Timeout

Range (0 - 120) *500

DLYADD#####

186

EAN/JAN-13 Addenda
Separator

Off

E13ADS0186*On

E13ADS1

186*Off

E13ISB0187

On

E13ISB1

187

Default All EAN/
JAN-8 Settings

EA8DFT

187

Off

EA8ENA0187*On

EA8ENA1187

Off

EA8CKX0187*On

EA8CKX1

187*2 Digit Addenda Off

EA8AD20188

2 Digit Addenda On

EA8AD21188*5 Digit Addenda Off

EA8AD50188

5 Digit Addenda On

EA8AD51

188*Not Required

EA8ARQ0

188

Required

EA8ARQ1

188

Addenda Timeout

Range (0 - 120) *500

DLYADD#####

188

EAN/JAN-8 Addenda
SeparatorOff

EA8ADS0189*On

EA8ADS1

189

Selection
EAN-13 Beginning with 378/379
Addenda Required

EAN-13 Beginning with 414/419
Addenda Required

EAN-13 Beginning with 434/439
Addenda Required

EAN-13 Beginning with 977
Addenda Required
EAN-13 Beginning with 978
Addenda Required
EAN-13 Beginning with 979
Addenda RequiredISBN Translate

EAN/JAN-8

EAN/JAN-8 Check Digit

EAN/JAN-8 Addenda

EAN/JAN-8 Addenda Required

Xenon XP User Guide

267

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

MSI

Default All MSI Settings

MSIDFT

189*Off

MSIENA0189

On

MSIENA1

189*Validate Type 10, but Don’t
Transmit

MSICHK0190

Validate Type 10 andTransmit

MSICHK1

190

Validate 2 Type 10 Chars, but
Don’t Transmit

MSICHK2

190

Validate 2 Type 10 Chars andTransmit

MSICHK3

190

Validate Type 11 then Type 10
Char, but Don’t Transmit

MSICHK4

190

Validate Type 11 then Type 10
Char and Transmit

MSICHK5190

Disable MSI Check Characters

MSICHK6

190

Minimum (4 - 48) *4

MSIMIN##

191

Maximum (4 - 48) *48

MSIMAX##

191

Default All
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
Settings

RSSDFT191

Off

RSSENA0191*On

RSSENA1

191

Default All GS1 DataBar Limited
Settings

RSLDFT

192

Off

RSLENA0192*On

RSLENA1

192

Default All GS1 DataBar
Expanded Settings

RSEDFT

192

Off

RSEENA0192*On

RSEENA1

192

GS1 DataBar Expanded Msg.
LengthMinimum (4 - 74) *4

RSEMIN##192

Maximum (4 - 74) *74

RSEMAX##

192

Trioptic Code*Off

TRIENA0193

On

TRIENA1

193

Default All Codablock A Settings

CBADFT

193*Off

CBAENA0193

On

CBAENA1

193

Minimum (1 - 600) *1

CBAMIN###

194

Maximum (1 - 600) *600

CBAMAX###

194

MSI Check Character

MSI Message Length

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

GS1 DataBar Limited

GS1 DataBar Expanded

Codablock A

Codablock A Msg. Length268

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Codablock F

Default All Codablock F Settings

CBFDFT

194*Off

CBFENA0194

On

CBFENA1

194

Minimum (1 - 2048) *1

CBFMIN####

194

Maximum (1 - 2048) *2048

CBFMAX####

194

On

LBLENA1

195*OffLBLENA0

195

Default All PDF417 Settings

PDFDFT

195*On

PDFENA1

195

OffPDFENA0195

Minimum (1-2750) *1

PDFMIN####196

Maximum (1-2750) *2750

PDFMAX####

196

*On

PDFMAC1

196

OffPDFMAC0

196

Default All Micro PDF417 Settings

MPDDFT

196

On

MPDENA1

196*OffMPDENA0196

Minimum (1-366) *1

MPDMIN###197

Maximum (1-366) *366

MPDMAX###

197

On

COMENA1

197*OffCOMENA0

197

On

COMUPC1

198*Off

COMUPC0198

Minimum (1-2435) *1

COMMIN####198

Maximum (1-2435) *2435

COMMAX####198

GS1-128 Emulation

EANEMU1

198

GS1 DataBar Emulation

EANEMU2197

GS1 Code Expansion Off

EANEMU3199

EAN8 to EAN13 Conversion

EANEMU4

199*GS1 Emulation Off

EANEMU0

199

On

T39ENA1

199*Off

T39ENA0

199

Default All QR Code Settings

QRCDFT

200*On

QRCENA1200OffQRCENA0200

Minimum (1-7089) *1

QRCMIN####200

Maximum (1-7089) *7089

QRCMAX####

200

Codablock F Msg. Length

Label CodePDF417

PDF417 Msg. Length

MacroPDF417

MicroPDF417

MicroPDF417 Msg. Length

GS1 Composite Codes

UPC/EAN Version

GS1 Composite Codes Msg. Length

GS1 Emulation

TCIF Linked Code 39

QR CodeQR Code Msg. Length

Xenon XP User Guide

269

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

QR Code Append*One Scan

QRCAPP1

200

Swipe

QRCAPP2

200

Point & ShootQRCAPP3200

OffQRCAPP0200

QR Code Page

QR Code Page (*3)

QRCDCP##

201

DotCodeDefault All DotCode Settings

DOTDFT

202

On

DOTENA1

202*Off

DOTENA0

202

Poor Quality DotCodes On

DOTEXS1

202*Poor Quality DotCodes Off

DOTEXS0202

Minimum (1- 2400) *1

DOTMIN####202

Maximum (1- 2400) *2400

DOTMAX####

202

Decoder Attempts (0-10) *3

DIGSTR##

203

Off

DIGENA0203

On

DIGENA1

203

Uses ID Decoder then Both
Decoders

DIGENA2

203*Uses Digimarc Decoder thenBoth Decoders

DIGENA3

203

Uses ID Decoder then Alternates
Decoders

DIGENA4

203

Uses Digimarc Decoder thenAlternates Decoders

DIGENA5

203

Default All Data Matrix Settings

IDMDFT

203*On

IDMENA1

203

Off

IDMENA0

203

Dotpeen DPM Decoding

DPMENA1

204*Disable DPM Decoding

DPMENA0

204

Reflective (Etched) DPM
Decoding

DPMENA2

204

Minimum (1-3116) *1

IDMMIN####205

Maximum (1-3116) *3116

IDMMAX####

205

Data Matrix Code Page

Data Matrix Code Page (*51)

IDMDCP##

205

MaxiCode

Default All MaxiCode Settings

MAXDFT

206

On

MAXENA1

206*OffMAXENA0

206

Minimum (1-150) *1

MAXMIN###206

Maximum (1-150) *150

MAXMAX###

206

Poor Quality DotCodes

DotCode Msg. Length

Digimarc Barcode

Data Matrix

Direct Part Marking (DPM)
Decoding

Data Matrix Msg. Length

MaxiCode Msg. Length

270

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Aztec CodeDefault All Aztec Code Settings

AZTDFT

207*On

AZTENA1207

OffAZTENA0207

Minimum (1-3832) *1

AZTMIN####

207

Maximum (1-3832) *3832

AZTMAX####

207

*On

AZTAPP1207

OffAZTAPP0207

Aztec Code Page

Aztec Code Page (*51)

AZTDCP##

208

Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) CodeDefault All Han Xin Code Settings

HX_DFT

208

On

HX_ENA1

208*Off

HX_ENA0

208

Minimum (1-7833) *1

HX_MIN####

209

Maximum (1-7833) *7833

HX_MAX####

209

2D Postal Codes*Off

POSTAL0209

Single 2D Postal Codes

Australian Post On

POSTAL1

209

British Post On

POSTAL7

209

Canadian Post On

POSTAL30

209

Intelligent Mail Barcode On

POSTAL10

209

Japanese Post On

POSTAL3210

KIX Post On

POSTAL4

210

Planet Code On

POSTAL5

210

Postal-4i On

POSTAL9

210

Postnet On

POSTAL6

210

Postnet with B and B’ Fields On

POSTAL11210

InfoMail On

POSTAL2210

InfoMail and British Post On

POSTAL8210

Intelligent Mail Barcode andPostnet with B and B’ Fields On

POSTAL20

210

Postnet and Postal-4i On

POSTAL14

211

Postnet and Intelligent Mail
Barcode On

POSTAL16

211

Postal-4i and Intelligent Mail
Barcode On

POSTAL17

211

Postal-4i and Postnet with B and
B’ Fields On

POSTAL19

211

Planet and Postnet On

POSTAL12

211

Planet and Postnet with B and B’Fields On

POSTAL18

211

Aztec Code Msg. Length

Aztec Append

Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) CodeMsg. Length

Postal Codes - 2D

Combination 2D Postal Codes

Xenon XP User Guide

271

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Planet and Postal-4i On

POSTAL13

211

Planet and Intelligent Mail
Barcode On

POSTAL15

211

Planet, Postnet, and Postal-4i On

POSTAL21

211

Planet, Postnet, and Intelligent
Mail Barcode On

POSTAL22

211

Planet, Postal-4i, and Intelligent
Mail Barcode On

POSTAL23

212

Postnet, Postal-4i, and Intelligent
Mail Barcode On

POSTAL24

212

Planet, Postal-4i, and Postnet with
B and B’ Fields On

POSTAL25

212

Planet, Intelligent Mail Barcode,
and Postnet with B and B’ Fields
On

POSTAL26

212

Postal-4i, Intelligent Mail
Barcode, and Postnet with B and
B’ Fields On

POSTAL27

212

Planet, Postal-4i, Intelligent Mail
Barcode, and Postnet On

POSTAL28

212

Planet, Postal-4i, Intelligent Mail
Barcode, and Postnet with B and
B’ Fields On

POSTAL29

212

Transmit

PLNCKX1

212*Don’t Transmit

PLNCKX0

213

Transmit

NETCKX1

213*Don’t Transmit

NETCKX0

213*Bar Output

AUSINT0

213

Numeric N Table

AUSINT1

213

Alphanumeric C Table

AUSINT2

213

Combination N and C Tables

AUSINT3

214

Default All China Post (Hong Kong
2 of 5) Settings

CPCDFT214*Off

CPCENA0214

On

CPCENA1

214

China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5)
Msg. Length

Minimum (2 - 80) *4

CPCMIN##214

Maximum (2 - 80) *80

CPCMAX##

214

Korea Post

Default All Korea Post Settings

KPCDFT215*OffKPCENA0215

On

KPCENA1

215

Selection

Planet Code Check Digit

Postnet Check Digit

Australian Post Interpretation

Postal Codes - Linear
China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5)272

Xenon XP User Guide

Selection

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Korea Post Msg. Length

Minimum (2 - 80) *4

KPCMIN##215

Maximum (2 - 80) *48

KPCMAX##

215

Transmit Check Digit

KPCCHK1

215*Don’t Transmit Check Digit

KPCCHK0

215

Default all Imaging Commands

IMGDFT

217

Imaging Style - Decoding

SNPSTY0

218*Imaging Style - Photo

SNPSTY1

218

Imaging Style - Manual

SNPSTY2

218

Beeper On

SNPBEP1

218*Beeper Off

SNPBEP0

218*Wait for Trigger Off

SNPTRG0

219

Wait for Trigger On

SNPTRG1

219*LED State - Off

SNPLED0219

LED State - On

SNPLED1

219

Exposure (1-7874 microseconds)*7874

SNPEXP

219*Gain - None

SNPGAN1

220

Gain - Medium

SNPGAN2

220

Gain - Heavy

SNPGAN4

220

Gain - Maximum

SNPGAN8220

Target White Value (0-255) *125

SNPWHT###

220

Delta for Acceptance (0-255) *25

SNPDEL###

220

Update Tries (0-10) *6

SNPTRY##

221

Target Set Point Percentage (199) *50

SNPPCT##

221*Infinity Filter - Off

IMGINF0222

Infinity Filter - On

IMGINF1

222*Compensation Off

IMGCOR0

222

Compensation On

IMGCOR1

222*Pixel Depth - 8 bits/pixel(grayscale)

IMGBPP8

222

Pixel Depth - 1 bit/pixel (B&W)

IMGBPP1

222*Don’t Sharpen Edges

IMGEDG0223

Sharpen Edges (0-23)

IMGEDG##

223*File Format - JPEGIMGFMT6

223

File Format - KIM

IMGFMT0

223

File Format - TIFF binary

IMGFMT1

223

Korea Post Check Digit

Imaging Default Commands
Image Snap

Image Ship

Xenon XP User Guide

273

Selection

274

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

File Format - TIFF binary group 4,
compressed

IMGFMT2

223

File Format - TIFF grayscale

IMGFMT3

223

File Format - UncompressedbinaryIMGFMT4

223

File Format - Uncompressedgrayscale

IMGFMT5

223

File Format - BMP

IMGFMT8

223*Histogram Stretch Off

IMGHIS0224

Histogram Stretch On

IMGHIS1

224*Noise Reduction Off

IMGFSP0225

Noise Reduction On

IMGFSP1

225

Invert Image around X axis

IMGNVX1

224

Invert Image around Y axis

IMGNVY1

224

Rotate Image none

IMGROT0

225

Rotate Image 90° right

IMGROT1

225

Rotate Image 180° right

IMGROT2

225

Rotate Image 90° left

IMGROT3

225

JPEG Image Quality (0-100) *50

IMGJQF###

226*Gamma Correction Off

IMGGAM0226

Gamma Correction On (0-1000)IMGGAM###

226

Image Crop - Left (0-843) *0

IMGWNL###

226

Image Crop - Right (0-843) *843

IMGWNR###

226

Image Crop - Top (0-639) *0

IMGWNT###

226

Image Crop - Bottom (0-639)*639

IMGWNB###

227

Image Crop - Margin (1-238) *0

IMGMAR###

227

Protocol - None (raw)

IMGXFR0

227

Protocol - None (default USB)IMGXFR2

227

Protocol - Hmodem Compressed(default RS232)

IMGXFR3

227

Protocol - Hmodem

IMGXFR4

227*Ship Every Pixel

IMGSUB1

228

Ship Every 2nd Pixel

IMGSUB2

228

Ship Every 3rd Pixel

IMGSUB3

228*Document Image Filter Off

IMGUSH0228

Document Image Filter On (0255)

IMGUSH###

228*Don’t Ship Histogram

IMGHST0229

Setting* Indicates default

Xenon XP User Guide

Setting* Indicates default

Serial Command# Indicates a numeric
entry

Page

Ship Histogram

IMGHST1

229

Force VGA Resolution

IMGVGA1

229*Native Resolution

IMGVGA0

230

Optimize On

DECBND1

230*Optimize Off

DECBND0230

Add Code I.D. Prefix to All Symbologies (Temporary)

PRECA2,BK2995C80!

237

Show Software Revision

REVINF

237

On

TSTMNU1238*Off

TSTMNU0238*Decoding Apps On

PLGDCE1

238

Decoding Apps Off

PLGDCE0

238*Formatting Apps On

PLGFOE1

238

Formatting Apps Off

PLGFOE0

238

List Apps

PLGINF

238

Remove Custom Defaults

DEFOVR

240

Activate Defaults

DEFALT

240

Selection

Image Size Compatibility

Intelligent Signature Capture

Utilities

Test Menu

Application Plug-Ins (Apps)

Reset the Factory Defaults

Xenon XP User Guide

275

276

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

12PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Xenon XP 1950g/1950h Corded Scanner ProductSpecifications
Parameter

Specification

Mechanical
Height6.5 inches (165mm)

Length3.9 inches (99mm)

Width

2.5 inches (64mm)

WeightGeneral Duty
Healthcare

5.3 ounces (150g)
5.5 ounces (155g)

Electrical
Voltage Requirements

4.4 to 5.5 VDC at input connector

Current Draw

ScanningStandby
500mA @ 5VDC, 2.5W

Illumination LED:
Peak Wavelength

624nm + 18nm (red LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”
442nm, 552nm (white LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”

Aiming:Peak Wavelength LED

624nm + 18nm (red LED)
520nm + 18nm (green LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”

Environmental
Temperature Ranges:
Operating

32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)

Storage-40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)

Humidity

0 to 95% non-condensing

Xenon XP User Guide

277

Parameter (Continued)

Specification

Mechanical Drop

Operational after 50 drops from 6 feet
(1.8m) to concrete

ESD Tolerance

Up to 15kV direct air
Up to 8 kV indirect coupling plane

Sealant Rating

IP42

Image
Image Size

1280 x 800 pixels

Scan Performance
Skew Angle+65°

Pitch Angle
1D barcode
2D barcode

1D code: +65°
2D code: +45°

Motion Tolerance

Up to 4.0 m/s (157 in/s) for 13 mil UPC at optimal
focus

Symbol Contrast

20% or greater (Grade A)

Xenon XP 1952g/1952h Cordless Scanner ProductSpecifications
Parameter

Specification

Mechanical
Height6.5 inches (165mm)

Length3.9 inches (99mm)

Width

2.5 inches (64mm)

WeightGeneral Duty
Healthcare

7.8 ounces (220g)
8.0 ounces (227g)

Electrical
Current Draw

Operating Power (Charging)
500mA @ 5VDC, 2.5W

Illumination LED:
Peak Wavelength

624nm + 18nm (red LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”
442nm, 552nm (white LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”

Aiming:Peak Wavelength LED

278

624nm + 18nm (red LED)
520nm + 18nm (green LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”

Xenon XP User Guide

Parameter (Continued)

Specification

Battery
Lithium Ion
Number of Scans

2400 mAHr minimum
Up to 50,000 per charge

Expected Hours of Operation

14

Expected Charge Time

4.5 hours

Radio
Frequency

2.4 to 2.5 GHz (ISM Band) Frequency Hopping
Bluetooth v 4.2

Range

33 ft. (10 m) typicalEnvironmental
Temperature Ranges:
Operating

32° F to +122° F (0° C to 50° C)

Storage with battery*-4°F to +95°F (-20°C to 35°C) for storage up to 90
days-4°F to +68°F (-20°C to 20°C) for storage up to 365
days

Storage without battery-40°F to +158°F (-40°C to 70°C)

Humidity

Up to 95% non-condensing

Mechanical Drop

Operational after 50 drops from 6 feet
(1.8 m) to concrete

ESD Sensitivity

Up to 15kV direct air
Up to 8 kV indirect coupling plane

Sealant Rating

IP42

Image
Image Size

1280 x 800 pixels

Scan Performance
Skew Angle+65°

Pitch Angle
1D barcode
2D barcode

1D barcodes: +65°
2D barcodes: +45°

Motion Tolerance

Up to 4.0 m/s (157 in/s) for 13 mil UPC at optimal
focus

Symbol Contrast

20% or greater (Grade A)*Storage outside of this temperature range could be detrimental to battery life.

Xenon XP User Guide

279

Xenon XP 1952g-BF/1952h-BF Scanner ProductSpecifications
Parameter

Specification

Mechanical
Height6.5 inches (165mm)

Length3.9 inches (99mm)

Width

2.5 inches (64mm)

WeightGeneral Duty
Healthcare

6.9 ounces (195g)
7.1 ounces (201g)

Use Time# of Scans per full charge

450 scans @ 1 scan per second

Expected Minutes of Operation

25 minutes @ 5 scans per minuteElectrical
Current Draw

Operating Power (Charging)
500mA @ 5VDC, 2.5W

Illumination LED:
Peak Wavelength

624nm + 18nm (red LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”
442nm, 552nm (white LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”

Aiming:Peak Wavelength LED

624nm + 18nm (red LED)
520nm + 18nm (green LED)
IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”

Radio
Frequency

2.4 to 2.5 GHz (ISM Band) Frequency Hopping
Bluetooth v.4.2

Range

33 ft. (10 m) typicalEnvironmental
Temperature Ranges:
Operating

32° F to +122° F (0° C to 50° C)

Storage-40°F to +158°F (-40°C to 70°C)

Humidity

Up to 95% non-condensing

Mechanical Drop

Operational after 50 drops from 3.3 feet
(1 m) to concrete

ESD Sensitivity

Up to 15kV direct air
Up to 8 kV indirect coupling plane

Sealant Rating

IP42

Image
Image Size

280

1280 x 800 pixels

Xenon XP User Guide

Parameter (Continued)

Specification

Scan Performance
Skew Angle+65°

Pitch Angle
1D barcode
2D barcode

1D barcodes: +65°
2D barcodes: +45°

Motion Tolerance

Up to 4.0 m/s (157 in/s) for 13 mil UPC at optimal
focus

Symbol Contrast

20% or greater (Grade A)

CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF Charge Base
Product Specifications
Parameter

Specification

Mechanical
Height3.2 inches (81.3mm)

Length5.19 inches (131.8mm)

Width

3.98 inches (101.1mm)

Weight6.3 oz (179g)

Electrical
Voltage:

4.5 to 5.5 VDC

Current Draw:
Host Terminal Port

500mA

Aux Power Port

1A

Charge Time

5 hours

Radio
Frequency

2.4 to 2.5 GHz (ISM Band) Frequency Hopping
Bluetooth v.2.1

Range

33 ft. (10 m) typical

Data Rate

Up to 1 MBps

Environmental
Temperature Ranges:
Operating

32° F to +122° F (0° C to +50° C)

Storage-40° F to +158° F (-40° C to +70° C)

Humidity

Up to 95% non-condensing

Mechanical Drop

Operational after 50 drops from 3.28 feet
(1 m) to concrete

Vibration

5G Peak from 22Hz to 300Hz

ESD Sensitivity

Up to 15kV direct air
Up to 8 kV indirect coupling plane

Xenon XP User Guide

281

Parameter (Continued)

Specification

Sealant Rating

IP41

CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF Charge Base
Product Specifications
Parameter

Specification

Mechanical
Height3.3 inches (83mm)

Length9.1 inches (231mm)

Width

3.5 inches (89mm)

Weight9.2 oz (260g)

Electrical
Voltage:4 to 5.5 VDC

Current Draw:
Host Terminal Port

500mA

Aux Power Port

1A

Charge Time (CCB-H-010BT)

From shut down to fully charged:
120 seconds via standard USB only
30 seconds via powered USB with external power

Charge Time (CCB-H-010BT-BF)

From shut down to fully charged:
25 seconds via standard USB only
15 seconds via powered USB with external power

Radio
Frequency

2.4 to 2.5 GHz (ISM Band) Frequency Hopping
Bluetooth v.4.2

Range

33 ft. (10 m) typical

Data Rate

Up to 130 kbps

Environmental
Temperature Ranges:

282

Operating/Battery Charge

41° F to +104° F (5° C to +40° C)

Storage without battery-40° F to +158° F (-40° C to +70° C)

Humidity

Up to 95% non-condensing

Mechanical Drop

Operational after 50 drops from 3.3 feet(1m) to concrete

Vibration

5G Peak from 22Hz to 300Hz

ESD Sensitivity

Up to 15kV direct air
Up to 8 kV indirect coupling plane

Sealant Rating

IP42

Xenon XP User GuideDepth of Field Charts
1950g/1952g/1952g-BF Typical Performance
Focus

Standard Range

High Density

Symbology

Near
Distance

Near
Distance

5 mil Code 39

13 mil UPC

20 mil Code 39

6.7 mil PDF417

10 mil Data Matrix

20 mil QR Code

Far
Distance

Far
Distance

mm

28

242

14

219

in.

1.1

9.5

0.6

8.6

mm

0

490

0

368

in.

0

19.3

0

14.5

mm

4

822

6

604

in.

0.1

32.4

0.2

23.8

mm

34

220

17

211

in.

1.4

8.7

1.4

8.3

mm

29

245

12

211

in.

1.1

9.7

1.1

8.3

mm

0

438

0

331

in.

0

17.2

0

13

Resolution (1D)

3 mil (.076mm)

2.5 mil (.064mm)

Resolution (PDF-417)

4 mil (.102mm)

3 mil (.076mm)

Resolution (QR/DM)

6 mil (.152mm)

5 mil (.127mm)

1950g/1952g/1952g-BF Guaranteed Performance
Focus

Standard Range

High Density

Symbology

Near
Distance

Near
Distance

5 mil Code 39

13 mil UPC

20 mil Code 39

6.7 mil PDF417

10 mil Data Matrix

Xenon XP User Guide

Far
Distance

Far
Distance

mm

37

219

21

206

in.

1.5

8.6

0.8

8.1

mm

10

419

10

328

in.

0.4

16.5

0.4

12.9

mm

13

609

14

526

in.

0.5

24

0.6

20.7

mm

46

205

20

200

in.

1.8

8.1

0.8

7.9

mm

44

227

18

195

in.

1.7

8.9

0.7

7.7

283

Focus (Continued)

Standard Range

High Density

Symbology(Continued)

Near
Distance

Near
Distance

20 mil QR Code

Far
Distance

Far
Distance

mm

21

351

23

290

in.

0.8

13.8

0.9

11.4

1950h/1952h/1952h-BF Typical Performance
Focus

Standard Range

High Density

Symbology

Near
Distance

Near
Distance

5 mil Code 39

13 mil UPC

20 mil Code 39

6.7 mil PDF417

10 mil Data Matrix

20 mil QR Code

Far
Distance

Far
Distance

mm

28

253

16

219

in.

1.1

10

0.6

8.6

mm

0

495

0

366

in.

0

19.5

0

14.4

mm

3

829

4

620

in.

0.1

32.6

0.2

24.4

mm

34

221

16

212

in.

1.3

8.7

0.6

8.3

mm

27

249

11

214

in.

1.1

9.8

0.4

8.4

mm

0

453

0

328

in.

0

17.8

0

12.9

Resolution (1D)

3 mil (.076mm)

2.5 mil (.064mm)

Resolution (PDF-47)

4 mil (.102mm)

3 mil (.076mm)

Resolution (QR/DM)

6 mil (.152mm)

5 mil/4 mil (0.127mm)/(.102mm)

1950h/1952h/1952h-BF Guaranteed Performance
Focus

Standard Range

High Density

Symbology

Near
Distance

Near
Distance

5 mil Code 39

13 mil UPC

20 mil Code 39

284

Far
Distance

Far
Distance

mm

38

233

22

201

in.

1.5

9.2

0.9

7.9

mm

10

416

10

322

in.

0.4

16.4

0.4

12.7

mm

13

602

14

560

in.

0.5

23.7

0.6

20.7

Xenon XP User Guide

Focus (Continued)

Standard Range

High Density

Symbology(Continued)

Near
Distance

Near
Distance

6.7 mil PDF417

10 mil Data Matrix

20 mil QR Code

Far
Distance

Far
Distance

mm

49

208

24

200

in.

1.9

8.2

0.9

7.9

mm

46

233

18

194

in.

1.8

9.2

0.7

7.6

mm

15

373

13

259

in.

0.6

14.7

0.5

10.2

Standard Connector Pinouts
Note: The following pin assignments are not compatible with some Honeywell legacy
products. Use of a cable with improper pin assignments may lead to damage to theunit. Use of any cables not provided by the manufacturer may result in damage notcovered by your warranty.

Keyboard Wedge
10 Pin RJ41 Modular Plug - connects to the base1

Cable shield2

Cable select3

Supply ground4

Terminal data

5

Terminal clock6

Keyboard clock

7+5V power

8

Keyboard data

910

Xenon XP User Guide

285

Serial Output
10 Pin RJ41 Modular Plug - connects to the base1

Cable shield2

Cable select3

Supply ground4

Transmit data

5

Receive data - serial data to scanner

6

CTS

7

+5V power

8

RTS

9
10

RS485 Output
10 Pin RJ41 Modular Plug - connects to the baseNote: RS485 signal conversion is performed in the cable.
1

Cable shield2

Cable select3

Supply ground4

Transmit data

5

Receive data - serial data to scanner

6
7+5V power

8

Transmit Enable

9
10

286

Xenon XP User Guide

USB
10 Pin Modular Plug - connects to the base1

Cable shield2

Cable select3

Supply ground

4
5
6
7

+5V power

89Data +

10 Data -Xenon XP User Guide

287

Required Safety Labels
Scanner

Illumination output

Part
Number,Serial Number
and Revision
Information
location

288

ComplianceLabel location

Xenon XP User Guide

CCB01-010BT/CCB01-010BT-BF BasePart Number,
SerialNumber andRevision
Information
location

Xenon XP User Guide

Compliance Labellocations289

CCB-H-010BT/CCB-H-010BT-BF BaseCompliance label
locations

290

Xenon XP User Guide

CHAPTER

13

MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING

Repairs
Repairs and/or upgrades are not to be performed on this product. These services
are to be performed only by an authorized service center (see Customer Support on
page xvii).

MaintenanceYour device provides reliable and efficient operation with a minimum of care.
Although specific maintenance is not required, the following sections describe
periodic checks to ensure dependable operation.

Clean the Scanner
The scanner or base’s housing may be cleaned with a soft cloth dampened withwater or a mild detergent-water solution. If a mild detergent solution is used, wipe
the scanner or base with a clean cloth dampened only with water to remove any
detergent residue.
Caution: Do not submerge the scanner in water. Do not use abrasive
wipes or cloths on the scanner’s window. Abrasive wipes may
scratch the window. Never use solvents (e.g., acetone) on the
housing or window. Solvents may damage the finish or thewindow.
Caution: Ensure all components are dry prior to mating the scanner withcharging accessories or other peripheral devices. Mating wet
components may cause damage not covered by the warranty.

Xenon XP User Guide

291

Clean the Window
Reading performance may degrade if the scanner’s window is not clean. If thewindow is visibly dirty, or if the scanner isn’t operating well, clean the window with
soft cloth dampened with water.
Caution: Do not use abrasive wipes or cloths on the scanner’s window.
Abrasive wipes may scratch the window. Never use solvents(e.g., acetone) on the window. Solvents may damage thewindow.

About Disinfectant-ready Models
Some configurations of Xenon XP scanners are available with an external plastic
housing that is designed to resist the effects of harsh chemicals. These scanners
are equipped with disinfectant-ready housings (DRH) for the healthcare andgeneral-purpose markets.
Please refer to the Honeywell Safety and Productivity Solutions website for specificdetails on how to clean Xenon XP scanners with disinfectant-ready housings.
Helpful information on the care of these specialty products can be found in thefollowing articles:•

Learn to Clean Honeywell Healthcare Disinfectant-Ready Products•

Honeywell Instructions for Cleaning General Purpose Disinfectant-Ready
Housing Devices

Inspect Cords and Connectors
Inspect the interface cable and connector for wear or other signs of damage. A
badly worn cable or damaged connector may interfere with scanner operation.
Contact your distributor for information about cable replacement. Cable
replacement instructions are on page 292.

Replace Cables in Corded Scanners
The standard interface cable is attached to the scanner with an 10-pin modular
connector. When properly seated, the connector is held in the scanner’s handle bya flexible retention tab. The interface cable is designed to be field replaceable.

292•

Order replacement cables from Honeywell or from an authorized distributor.

•

When ordering a replacement cable, specify the cable part number of theoriginal interface cable.

Xenon XP User GuideReplace an Interface Cable
1. Turn off the power to the host system.
2. Disconnect the scanner’s cable from theterminal or computer.
3. Locate the small hole on the back of thescanner’s handle. This is the cable release.
4. Straighten one end of a paper clip.
5. Insert the end of the paper clip into the small
hole and press in. This depresses the retentiontab, releasing the connector. Pull the connector
out while maintaining pressure on the paper
Cable
clip, then remove the paper clip.

Release

6. Replace with the new cable.
Insert the connector into the opening and press firmly. The connector is keyed
to go in only one way, and will click into place.

Replace Cables and Batteries in Cordless Systems
Replace an Interface Cable in a Base
1. Turn the power to the host system OFF.
2. Disconnect the base’s cable from the terminal or computer.
3. Turn the base upside down.
4. Pull the connector out while maintaining pressure on the connector release
clip.
CCB01-010BT
Base:

Xenon XP User Guide

CCB-H-010BT Base:293

5. Replace with the new cable. Insert the connector into the opening and press
firmly. The connector is keyed to go in only one way, and will click into place.

Change a Scanner Battery
1. Grasp the wing connector or use a Phillips
head screwdriver to remove the screw fromthe end cap.
2. Remove the end cap and remove the battery
from the handle.
3. Insert replacement battery.
4. Replace end cap and screw together.

End Cap

Troubleshoot a Corded Scanner
The scanner automatically performs self-tests whenever you turn it on. If yourscanner is not functioning properly, review the following Troubleshooting Guide totry to isolate the problem.
Is the power on? Is the aimer on?
If the aimer isn’t illuminated, check that:•

The cable is connected properly.

•

The host system power is on (if external power isn’t used).

•

The trigger works.

Is the scanner having trouble reading your symbols?
If the scanner isn’t reading symbols well, check that the symbols:•

Aren’t smeared, rough, scratched, or exhibiting voids.

•

Aren’t coated with frost or water droplets on the surface.

•

Are enabled in the scanner or in the decoder to which the scanner connects.

Is the barcode displayed but not entered?
The barcode is displayed on the host device correctly, but you still have to press a
key to enter it (the Enter/Return key or the Tab key, for example).
•

294

You need to program a suffix. Programming a suffix enables the scanner to
output the barcode data plus the key you need (such as “CR”) to enter the data

Xenon XP User Guideinto your application. Refer to Prefix/Suffix Overview on page 127 for further
information.
If you aren’t sure what programming options have been set in the scanner, or if you
want the factory default settings restored, refer to Reset the Factory Defaults on
page 240.

Troubleshoot a Cordless System
Troubleshoot a Base
Note: Visit the Services and Support section of our website (www.honeywellaidc.com) tocheck for the latest software for both the scanner and the base.
If your base is not functioning properly, review the following troubleshooting
guidelines to try to isolate the problem.
Is the red LED on?
If the red LED isn’t illuminated, check that:•

The power cable is connected properly and there is power at the power source.

•

The host system power is on (if external power isn’t used).

Is the green LED on?
If the green LED isn’t illuminated, check that:•

The scanner is correctly placed in the base.

•

There is external power or 12 volt host power.

•

Charge mode is turned on. (See "Beeper and LED Sequences and Meaning" onpage 48)•

The battery is not bad or deeply discharged. In some cases, the scanner’s battery
may trickle charge to bring it into an acceptable level and then transition to anormal charge cycle.

Troubleshoot a Cordless Scanner
Note: Make sure that your scanner’s battery is charged.
Visit the Services and Support section of our website (www.honeywellaidc.com) tocheck for the latest software for both the scanner and the base or Access Point.
Is the scanner having trouble reading your symbols?
If the scanner isn’t reading symbols well, check that the symbols:•

Aren’t smeared, rough, scratched, or exhibiting voids.

•

Aren’t coated with frost or water droplets on the surface.

Xenon XP User Guide

295

•

Are enabled in the base or Access Point to which the scanner connects.

Is the barcode displayed but not entered into the application?
The barcode is displayed on the host device correctly, but you still have to press a
key to enter it (the Enter/Return key or the Tab key, for example).
•

You need to program a suffix. Programming a suffix enables the scanner to
output the barcode data plus the key you need (such as “CR”) to enter the data
into your application. Refer to Prefix/Suffix Overview on page 127 for further
information.

The scanner won’t read your barcode at all.

296•

Scan the sample barcodes in the back of this manual. If the scanner reads the
sample barcodes, check that your barcode is readable.

•

Verify that your barcode symbology is enabled (see Chapter 8).

Xenon XP User GuideAPPENDIXAREFERENCE CHARTS

Symbology Charts
Note: “m” represents the AIM modifier character. Refer to International Technical
Specification, Symbology Identifiers, for AIM modifier character details.
Prefix/Suffix entries for specific symbologies override the universal (All Symbologies,99) entry.
Refer to Data Edit beginning on page 127 and Data Format beginning on page 133
for information about using Code ID and AIM ID.

Linear Symbologies
AIM
Linear Symbology

ID

HoneywellPossible modifiers(m)

ID

All Symbologies

Hex
99

Codabar]Fm

Code 11]H3

Code 128]Cm

Code 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF)]X0

Code 39 (supports Full ASCII mode)]Am

TCIF Linked Code 39 (TLC39)

]L2

0-1

0, 1, 2, 4

0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 7

a

61

h

68

j

6A

<

3C

b

62

T

54

Code 93 and 93i]Gm0-9, A-Z,
a-m

i

69

EAN

]Em

0, 1, 3, 4d64

EAN-13 (including Bookland EAN)

]E0

d

64

EAN-13 with Add-On

]E3

d

64

EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code

]E3

d

64

EAN-8

]E4

D

44

Xenon XP User Guide

297

AIM
Linear Symbology
EAN-8 with Add-On

ID

HoneywellPossible modifiers
(m)

]E3

ID

Hex

D

44

y

79

GS1
GS1 DataBar]em

GS1 DataBar Limited

]em

{

7B

GS1 DataBar Expanded

]em

}

7D

GS1-128

]C1

I

49

China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5)

]X0

Q

51

Interleaved 2 of 5

]Im

e

65

Matrix 2 of 5

]X0

m

6D

NEC 2 of 5

]X0

Y

59

Straight 2 of 5 IATA

]Rm

f

66

Straight 2 of 5 Industrial

]S0

f

66

g

67

t

74

0

2 of 5MSI]Mm

Telepen]Bm

UPC

0, 1, 30, 1, 30, 1

0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, A, B, C

UPC-A

]E0

c

63

UPC-A with Add-On

]E3

c

63

UPC-A with Extended Coupon Code

]E3

c

63

UPC-E

]E0

E

45

UPC-E with Add-On

]E3

E

45

UPC-E1]X0

E

45

Add Honeywell Code ID

5C80

Add AIM Code ID

5C81

Add Backslash

5C5C

Batch mode quantity

535

2D Symbologies
AIM
2D Symbology

ID

HoneywellPossible modifiers(m)

ID

All Symbologies
Aztec Code

298

Hex
99

]zm

0-9, A-Cz

7A

Xenon XP User Guide

AIM
2D Symbology

ID

Chinese Sensible Code (Han Xin Code)]X0

Codablock A]O6

Codablock F

HoneywellPossible modifiers
(m)

ID

Hex

H

48

0, 1, 4, 5, 6

V

56

]Om

0, 1, 4, 5, 6

q71

Code 49]Tm

0, 1, 2, 4l

6C

Data Matrix

]dm

0-6

w

77

Dot Code

]J0

.

2E

GS1

]em

0-3

y

79

GS1 Composite

]em

0-3

y

79

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

]em

0-3

y

79

MaxiCode

]Um

0-3

x

78

PDF417

]Lm

0-2

r

72

]Lm

0-5

R

52

]Qm

0-6

s

73

]Qm

s

73

AIM

Honeywell

MicroPDF417
QR CodeMicro QR Code

Postal Symbologies
Postal Symbology

ID

Possible modifiers(m)

ID

All Symbologies

Hex
99

Australian Post

]X0

A

41

British Post

]X0

B

42

Canadian Post

]X0

C

43

China Post

]X0

Q

51

InfoMail

]X0

,

2c

Intelligent Mail Barcode

]X0

M

4D

Japanese Post

]X0

J

4A

KIX (Netherlands) Post

]X0

K

4B

Korea Post

]X0

?

3F

Planet Code

]X0

L

4C

Postal-4i

]X0

N

4E

Postnet

]X0

P

50

Xenon XP User Guide

299

ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252)
In keyboard applications, ASCII Control Characters can be represented in 3
different ways, as shown below. The CTRL+X function is OS and application
dependent. The following table lists some commonly used Microsoft functionality.
This table applies to U.S. style keyboards. Certain characters may differ dependingon your Country Code/PC regional settings.
Non-printable
ASCII
control characters

300

Keyboard Control + ASCII (CTRL+X) ModeControl + X Mode Off(KBDCAS0)

Windows Mode Control + X
Mode On (KBDCAS2)
CTRL + X
CTRL + X
function

DEC

HEX

Char

0

00

NUL

Reserved

CTRL+ @

1

01

SOH

NP Enter

CTRL+ A

Select all

2

02

STX

Caps Lock

CTRL+ B

Bold

3

03

ETX

ALT Make

CTRL+ C

Copy

4

04

EOT

ALT Break

CTRL+ D

Bookmark

5

05

ENQ

CTRL Make

CTRL+ E

Center

606

ACK

CTRL BreakCTRL+ F

Find

7

07

BEL

Enter / Ret

CTRL+ G

808

BS

(Apple Make)

CTRL+ H

9

09

HT

Tab

CTRL+ I

Italic

100A

LF(Apple Break)

CTRL+ J

Justify

11

0B

VT

Tab

CTRL+ K

hyperlink

DeleteCTRL+ Llist,
left alignCTRL+ M

History

12

0C

FF

13

0D

CR

Enter / Ret

14

0E

SO

InsertCTRL+ N

New

15

0F

SI

ESC

CTRL+ O

Open

16

10

DLE

F11

CTRL+ P

Print

17

11

DC1

Home

CTRL+ Q

Quit

18

12

DC2

PrtScnCTRL+ R

19

13

DC3

Backspace

CTRL+ S

20

14

DC4

Back TabCTRL+ T

21

15

NAK

F12

CTRL+ U

22

16

SYN

F1

CTRL+ V

23

17

ETB

F2

CTRL+ W

24

18

CAN

F3

CTRL+ X

25

19

EM

F4

CTRL+ Y

26

1A

SUB

F5

CTRL+ Z

27

1B

ESC

F6

CTRL+ [

28

1C

FS

F7

CTRL+ \

29

1D

GS

F8

CTRL+ ]

30

1E

RS

F9

CTRL+ ^

31

1F

US

F10

CTRL+ -

127

7F

⌂

NP Enter

Save

Paste

?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?

Xenon XP User Guide

Lower ASCII Reference Table
Note: Windows Code page 1252 and lower ASCII use the same characters.
Printable Characters
DEC
HEX
Character

DEC

HEX

Character DEC

HEX

Character

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F

@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F

`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
⌂

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

<SPACE>
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?

96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127

Extended ASCII Characters
DEC
HEX
CP 1252 ASCII

Alternate Extended

PS2 Scan Code

128

80

Ç

up arrow ↑

0x48

129

81

ü

down arrow ↓

0x50

130

82

‚

é

right arrow →

0x4B

131

83

ƒ

â

left arrow ←

0x4D

132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139

84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B

„
…
†
‡
ˆ
‰
Š
‹

ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï

InsertDeleteHome
End
Page Up
Page Down
Right ALT
Right CTRL

0x52
0x53
0x47
0x4F
0x49
0x51
0x38
0x1D

Xenon XP User Guide€

301

Extended ASCII Characters (Continued)
DEC
HEX
CP 1252 ASCII
Alternate Extended
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193

302

8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0
C1

Œ
Ž

‘
’
“
”
•
–
—
˜
™
š
›
œ
ž
Ÿ
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
§
¨
©
ª
«
¬
®
¯
°
±
²
³
´
µ
¶
·
¸
¹
º
»
¼
½
¾
¿
À
Á

î
ì
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
¢
£
¥
₧
ƒ
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
º
¿
⌐
¬
½
¼
¡
«
»
░
▒
▓
│
┤
╡
╢
╖
╕
╣
║
╗
╝
╜
╛
┐
└
┴

PS2 Scan CodeReserved
Reserved
Numeric Keypad Enter
Numeric Keypad /
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Numeric Keypad +Numeric Keypad Numeric Keypad *Caps Lock
Num Lock
Left Alt
Left Ctrl
Left Shift
Right Shift
Print Screen
Tab
Shift TabEnter
Esc
Alt Make
Alt BreakControl Make
Control BreakAlt Sequence with 1 Character
Ctrl Sequence with 1 Character

n/a
n/a
0x1C
0x35
0x3B
0x3C
0x3D
0x3E
0x3F
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x57
0x58
0x4E
0x4A
0x37
0x3A
0x45
0x38
0x1D
0x2A
0x36
n/a
0x0F
0x8F
0x1C
0x01
0x36
0xB6
0x1D
0x9D
0x36
0x1D

Xenon XP User Guide

Extended ASCII Characters (Continued)
DEC
HEX
CP 1252 ASCII
Alternate Extended
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247

Xenon XP User Guide

C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7

Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷

PS2 Scan Code

┬
├
─
í
╞
╟
╚
╔
╩
╦
╠
═
╬
╧
╨
╤
╥
╙
╘
╒
╓
╫
╪
┘
┌
█
▄
▌
▐
▀
α
ß
Γ
π
Σ
σ
µ
τ
Φ
Θ
Ω
δ
∞
φ
ε
∩
≡
±
≥
≤
⌠
⌡
÷
≈

303

Extended ASCII Characters (Continued)
DEC
HEX
CP 1252 ASCII
Alternate Extended
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF

ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ

PS2 Scan Code

°
∙
·
√
ⁿ
²
■

ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements
Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters. If the data
received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because thebarcode being scanned was created using a code page that is different from theone the host program is expecting. If this is the case, select the code page withwhich the barcodes were created. The data characters should then appear properly.

Standard

Keyboard
Country

Honeywell
Code
Page
OptionUnited States(standard ASCII)

ISO/IEC 646-IRVn/a1

Automatic National Character
Replacement

ISO/IEC 2022

n/a

2 (default)

Binary Code page

n/a

n/a

3

Code Page Selection Method/
Country

Default “Automatic National Character replacement” will select the below Honeywell Code
Page options for Code128, Code 39 and Code 93.

304

United States

ISO/IEC 646-06

01

CanadaISO /IEC 646-121

54

95

CanadaISO /IEC 646-122

18

96

Japan

ISO/IEC 646-14

28

98

China

ISO/IEC 646-57

92

99

Great Britain (UK)ISO /IEC 646-04

7

87

FranceISO /IEC 646-69

3

83

Germany

ISO/IEC646-21

4

84

Switzerland

ISO /IEC 646-CH

6

86

Sweden / Finland (extended Annex C)

ISO/IEC 646-11

2

82

Ireland

ISO /IEC 646-207

73

97

Denmark

ISO/IEC 646-08

8

88

NorwayISO/IEC 646-60

9

94

Italy

ISO/IEC 646-15

585Portugal

ISO/IEC 646-16

13

92

Xenon XP User Guide

Standard

Keyboard
Country

Honeywell
Code
Page
OptionSpain

ISO/IEC 646-17

10

90

Spain

ISO/IEC 646-85

51

91

Code Page Selection Method/
Country

Xenon XP User Guide

305

64

91

92

93

94

96

123

124

125

126

Hex

23

24

40

5B

5C

5D

5E

60

7B

7C

7D

7E

US

0

1

#

$

@

[

\

]

^

`

{

|

}

~

CA

54

95

#

$

à

â

ç

ê

î

ô

é

ù

è

û

CA

18

96

#

$

à

â

ç

ê

É

ô

é

ù

è

û

JP

28

98

#

$

@

[

¥

]

^

`

{

|

}

‾

CN

92

99

#

¥

@

[

\

]

^

`

{

|

}

‾

GB

7

87

£

$

@

[

\

]

^

`

{

|

}

˜

FR

3

83

£

$

à

°

ç

§

^

µ

é

ù

è

¨

DE

4

84

#

$

§

Ä

Ö

Ü

^

`

ä

ö

ü

ß

CH

6

86

ù

$

à

é

ç

ê

î

ô

ä

ö

ü

û

SE/FI

2

82

#

¤

É

Ä

Ö

Å

Ü

é

ä

ö

å

ü

DK

8

88

#

$

@

Æ

Ø

Å

^

`

æ

ø

å

˜

NO

9

94

#

$

@

Æ

Ø

Å

^

`

æ

ø

å

¯

IE

73

97

£

$

Ó

É

Í

Ú

Á

ó

é

í

ú

á

IT

5

85

£

$

§

°

ç

é

^

ù

à

ò

è

ì

PT

13

92

#

$

§

Ã

Ç

Õ

^

`

ã

ç

õ

°

ES

10

90

#

$

§

¡

Ñ

¿

^

`

°

ñ

ç

˜

ES

51

91

#

$

·

¡

Ñ

Ç

¿

`

´

ñ

ç

¨

Honeywell
CodePage36

Country
Keyboard

35

COUNTRY

Dec

306

ISO / IEC 646 National Character Replacements

Xenon XP User Guide

Keyboard Key References
6E

70 71 72 73

74 75 76 77

78 79 7A 7B

7C 7D 7E

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0F
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D
1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2B

4B 50 55
4C 51 56

2C 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
39
3D
3A 3B 3C
3E 3F 38 40

53
4F 54 59

5A 5F 64 69
5B 60 65
6A
5C 61 66
5D 62 67
6C
63 68

104 Key U.S. Style Keyboard

6E

70 71 72 73

74 75 76 77

78 79 7A 7B

7C 7D 7E

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0F
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 2B
1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A

4B 50 55
4C 51 56

2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
39
3D
3A 3B 3C
3E 3F 38 40

53
4F 54 59

5A 5F 64 69
5B 60 65
6A
5C 61 66
5D 62 67
6C
63 68

105 Key European Style Keyboard

Xenon XP User Guide

307

308

Xenon XP User Guide

SAMPLE SYMBOLS
UPC-AInterleaved 2 of 5

0 123456 7890

01234567890

EAN-139 780330 290951

Code 128

Code 39

Code 128

BC321

CodabarA13579B

Code 93

Straight 2 of 5 Industrial

123456-9$

123456

Matrix 2 of 56543210

RSS-14

PDF417(01) 00123456789012

Car Registration

Code 49

1234567890

Xenon XP User Guide

309

SAMPLE SYMBOLS (CONTINUED)
PostnetData Matrix

Zip Code
Test Symbol

QR CodeNumbers

MaxiCode

Micro PDF417

Test Message

Test Message

DotCode

12345

310

Xenon XP User Guide

PROGRAMMING CHART
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Xenon XP User Guide

311

PROGRAMMING CHART (CONTINUED)
A

B

C

D

E

F

Save

DiscardReset

Note: If you make an error while scanning the letters or digits (before scanning Save), scan
Discard, scan the correct letters or digits, and Save again.

312

Xenon XP User Guide

Honeywell9680 Old Bailes Road
Fort Mill, SC 29707

www.honeywellaidc.com™

XEN195X-EN-UG-01 Rev E
7/20